Home

2009 Ram Truck 1500 (Gas) Owner Manual

1. CONTENTS EN a Mirrors cu oo packs ET ORC ra eR 93 Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped 98 Inside Day Night Mirror 93 Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 94 If Equipped s ctug seats ee eae ne vba bs 98 Outside Mirrors 0 20000000 94 Miiconnecr phone IE EMP Pet epsa i Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 95 CPS dietas i NE Renae ee brisa ds 101 Power Mirrors If Equipped 000 96 Phone Call Features 0 109 Heated Mirrors If Equipped sse 97 uconnect phone Features 112 Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror Advanced Phone Connectivity 117 f Equipped vise RRREEWESTA 97 Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone 0000000000 119 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME General Information 0 ll Voice Recognition VR System It Equipped 3 2 4 eterne RES Voice Recognition VR System Operation Commands Voice Training Bi Seats Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped Adjustable Head Restraints Eight Way Power Seats If Equipped Power Lumbar If Equipped Heated
2. 404 ha d T 408 Trailer Towing Guide llle 404 Trailer Weight lt csset Sak woe EROR Se a i e 404 Transfer Case ive cides nekaa ieaie eD 466 Electronically Shifted issu 327 333 Fluid ira pe he sate REPE A ADS 490 Transmission usa e es eai eee egets 315 Autonmatie aieu es cdm Rex 315 320 466 Fluid 233 6 Siew ERRISPReeREH RES 490 Maintenance o oe does nee doe ede ees 466 Shifting gene toe desea pp eee ee eae dues 312 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 004 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink8 20 3244 RIS RR RS 174 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 004 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Tread Wear Indicators 005 375 Trip Odometer sas etes desig Sis bos ment a hae 231 Turn Signals lt io esett earranan 152 227 481 484 uconnect Hands Free Phone 99 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 519 Universal Transmitter lisse 174 Utility Rails Rear Cargo Area 214 Variance Compass pest piu epimer a 254 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading llle 367 396 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage lese 303 480 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 00 290 Voice Recognition System VR 127 Voltmeter 4 22sec essa m e m9 were 23
3. 341 Flowing Rising Water 341 Shallow Standing Water 341 li Driving Off Road r9 ces 343 H Power Steering say ioe eer brueEm eques 343 Power Steering Fluid Check 345 M Parking Brake 22ibosxo cub ea 346 B Brake System oss kir REOR EC 347 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System 348 li Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 349 H Electronic Brake Control System 350 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 350 Traction Control System TCS 351 Brake Assist System BAS 351 Hill Start Assist HSA 352 Electronic Stability Program ESP 356 Trailer Sway Control TSC 361 H Tire Safety Information esee s 362 Tire Markings 0 000000 362 Tire Identification Number TIN 366 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 367 Wi Tires General Information 371 Tire Pressure 2 0 eee ee eee 371 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 385 Tire Inflation Pressures 0 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires 00 Tire Spinning ses sie ee wA ares Tread Wear Indicators Ls Life OL Te zc xo cot etos E actenus e ires Replacement Tires lille
4. 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE S
5. Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 503 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LI Rotate the tires J Replace the engine air cleaner filter Q Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Q Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate the tires J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Replace the side row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Replace the ignition cables 4 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for OOC O O C C damage wear improper looseness or end play repl
6. Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil 2 Rotate the tires filter I If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and M Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet 5 7L Engines off road or frequent trailer towing T Inspect the transfer case fluid J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Wi 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M A v 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service iB 42 Months Ma
7. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution there fore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTR
8. LL 492 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 445 Manual Service i a d ae ana Se YR 517 Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check 0 0 00005 5 466 Lubricant Selection llle 490 Memory Seat eee 4 44 Se 4a e odes 141 Mini Trip Computer 00000000 252 MIFIOIS Jide daagt ox x eR RR EE X EGER NS 93 Automatic Dimming lees 94 Electric Powered cee eee eee 96 Heated lt 9 2e 35 se eaten tes are ER e 97 MeMOry Goste guck eae aw RE S dee ers 141 532 INDEX ee Otd cssc radi ies E UICE SURE VY 94 REAKVIEW ix bex eedek eR PEE ald amp hae URS 93 Mode Fuel Saver ee ns 251 252 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 381 Mopar Parts 22er Re eter gs 446 516 Multi Displacement Engine System 349 Multi Function Control Lever 151 Navigation System uconnect gps 168 New Vehicle Break In Period 0 81 Occupant Restraints 0040 39 60 64 Occupant Restraints Sedan 56 60 63 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 386 Odometer 0 0 cee eee 231 T s Any reae ean OE eee s E ee 231 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 343 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 343 Oil Change Indicator isses 233 249 Oil Change Indicator Reset 233 249 OM Engine xe ER Bee
9. 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension
10. 3157K Side Marker Quad Headlamp 3157NA Rear License Plate Lamp 194 Rear Cargo Lamp reedrider iat 00000000000 921 Rear Tail Turn and Stop 3157K BULB REPLACEMENT Dual or Quad Headlamp Front Park and Turn Signal If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 3 Remove the four plastic push in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both Ij fender ledges 4 Remove the two plastic push in rivets that secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator 5 Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 6 Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment 8 Reach through the access hole of the wheel house screws splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing 073306874 7 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel remove the fastener and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield 9 Remove the headlamp assembly Grasp the outboard Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen access hole gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet 073306875 E MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 10 Disconnect electrical connectors Fog Lamps 11 Replace bulb s as necessary
11. Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate pope se psp npo oe GI SINGLE DISC wpa
12. e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de
13. 3 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature buttons Once the desired tem perature is displayed the system will achieve and auto matically maintain that comfort level 4 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC display until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected or by adjusting the blower control knob and setting the fan to any fixed speed 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Manual Operation This system offers a full complem
14. Delete All to delete all memos System Setup B To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recogni tion 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these are
15. Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal I distance check
16. TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire inflation placard pressure The placard pressure is defined on the Tire and Loading Information label The Tire and Loading Information label is located on the drivers side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi mately 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than one mile after a three hour period For information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires refer to Tire Pressure under Tires General Information in this section The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold plac
17. WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal 316 STARTING AND OPERATING EE REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Tow ing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE This range is for most city and highway driving 2 Second This range is for moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to second gear Will not shift to third ge
18. ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging and Frosting Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild rainy and or humid weather Windows may frost on the inside of the glass in very cold weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow can cause odor and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS gt e Hot weather and vehicle interior is very Cold Weather Set the mode control to on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort e Set the mode control
19. in section 5 of this manual ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position the light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information 8 4WD Indicator This light indicates the vehicle is in four wheel AWD drive and 4LOCK 4WD allows all four wheels to receive torque from the engine simulta neously 9 AWD Auto Indicator The 4WD auto indicator will be illuminated
20. Customer Programmable Features SETUP under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood To open the hood two latches must be released and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release it before raising the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel 031305529 Safety Latch Hood Release 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving e 7 031405770 Headlight Switch Location LIGHTS Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog The headlight switch is located on the left side of the light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less suscep instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head tible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as light switch controls the operation of the headlights scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and clea
21. Transfer Case Switch Four Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD and 4LOW are located in the instrume
22. ous engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for sev eral minutes and then the electrical system and volt meter needle will stabilize 22 Cargo Light The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo oN light is activated by pressing the cargo light T button on the headlight switch 23 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti lock Brake System reservoir 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides
23. 6 anteur ee 201 Heated ies e aloe hag dest ae 138 Memory ueque yeeteueas ee eons 141 Power os aceite ive eae Rer nd EE EE 136 Reclning a ses eec xc aos ahs Marae 134 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 459 489 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service ASSISTANCE vds dcs ve ach OR pe 513 Service Contract o cu ed bs eaced Ode exa ed dee 515 ServiceManuals oresar draps e o e des 517 Setting the Clock 261 262 265 274 Settings Personal n nannaa aaar 255 Shif ing ie crm dee R Oa a ERU Ves 312 Automatic Transmission 315 320 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral IN eum bald eae weed eee 413 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 0 2 ee eee eee 415 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 49 Shoulder Belts sss cee eee ee ns 41 Side AID aS out ies ER eR ee A 62 Signals Tutti isses eR e n 85 152 227 536 INDEX EBENEN Sliding Rear Window lov MP T 200 Snow Chains Tire Chains 378 SNOW POW ag EE coy hark od ae aie ERR Se 411 SNOW Tires dca etwas Geant eai HE RU ea OY qd ee 379 Spark Pl gs ad SER deste ERR der E EORR 489 Speed Control Cruise Control 160 Speedofeter use a ques Y PESE AM Rs 228 Star np cae vo ais ea ee ATP e RU oa 25
24. Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for O O C O damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary L Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires filter LJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date
25. Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could cause the vehicle battery to discharge If the lid is required to stay open for extended periods of time it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off manually using the on off switch The Rambox storage bins can be locked using the vehicle key To lock the storage bin insert the key into the keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock CAUTION e Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before moving or driving vehicle Continued CAUTION Continued e Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching hinging mechanisms Damage to the Rambox bin may occur due to heavy sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle motion In order to minimize potential for damage secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy sharp objects with appropriate padding Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs to allow water to drain from bins To remove plug pull up on the edge To install push plug downward into drain hole NOTE Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports These accessories in addi tion to other Rambox accessories are available from Mopar ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Bed Extender If Equipped The bed extender has three functional positions e Storage Position e Divide
26. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from around the occupant and exhaust it underneath the seat and into the passenger compart ment The fans draw this air across the surface of the seat using air ducts and fine perforations in the covering to help keep the driver cooler in higher ambient tempera tures The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The fans operate at two speeds High and Low E 030905581 Press the switch once to choose High press it a second time to choose Low Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat Off When High speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When Low speed is selected one light will be illuminated NOTE e The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate e The drivers ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Section 2 for further information 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped The seat is divided into three segments The outboard seat portions are each 40 of the total width of the seat The back of the center portion 20 easily folds down to provide an armrest center storage compartment if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED The memory seat butto
27. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Raie kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 AB AEE E 312 9580 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 60 64 IM Layer 3 24 22 05 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not
28. Right Stop Turn 410 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Any work done to the vehicle s electrical system or wiring should be performed by a qualified automo tive technician If done improperly it may cause damage to the electrical system wiring and could result in serious or fatal injury Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select TOW HAUL mode if equipped or select a lower gear using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature NOTE Using TOW HAUL mode or a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Tow Haul To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or select a lower gear range using the Electronic Range
29. lete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To ente
30. position To enable the window controls press the win Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of dow LOCK button again and return the switch to the pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the released or up position ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or in partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting Window Lockout Switch 1 Window Lockout Switch 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING WARNING Continued Safety Warning In an accident serious injury could result if the Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal storage bin covers are not properly latched injury or damage to your vehicle Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin WARNING e Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down e Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Rambox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
31. position the extender so the form the following outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides of the bed 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates 036706565 3 Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends Center Handle and Lock are secured into the intended slots of the bed 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side Extender Position gates in the closed position The extender position allows you to load the bed of the truck beyond the tail gate The bed extender will add an additional 15 in 38 cm in the back of the truck when additional cargo room is needed The extender position utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both sides of the truck bed near the tailgate 036706568 Side Gates Closed 5 Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place and assist against theft 036706569 Extender Position 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To install the bed extender into the extender position perform the following 1 Lower the tailgate 2 Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the center handle vertically in order to release the extender side gates 3 Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle Extender Instal
32. programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
33. seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 022605547 un 3 D Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing Latch Plate To Buckle 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued WARNING Continued A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not we
34. seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instruc tions below See your authorized dealer for help if necessary ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center Front Seat Regular Cab All Seats 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat 2 Lift the cover if so equipped and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence Quad Cab Crew Cab Rear Seats 1 Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat The tether strap may be retained with an elastic band Accessibility to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat cushion to the up position Remove the elastic before use ee THINGS TO KNOW BEF
35. supported 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this butto
36. systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking For more information about ABS refer to Brake System in this section from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Traction Control System TCS The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven
37. that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pr
38. use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Samplin ndm Ha Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on
39. 269 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play
40. 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI INFLATION PR SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 420kPa 60PSI A Tire and Loading Information Placard 811b5a9a STARTING AND OPERATING 367 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 368 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never
41. 309 Automatic Transmission 04 309 Engine Fails to Start 000 310 Remote c05 5h sagged cee Geek EX Hine ward 25 Starting Procedures Gas Engines 309 Steering POWeE aos scn4 see abo 4 a eee aayi 4 Rs 343 345 Wheel Tilt 3 208s RE REA 156 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound system Controls c ea eee e ehe 291 Storage Compartment Center Seat 194 Storage Vehicle ss sesia oer eere 303 480 Storing Your Vehicle 0000000 480 Sun Roof 24 sos eec e e n eee as 180 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 377 Sway Control Trailer 2 osse es 361 Synthetic Engine Qilsa sperite ssr ant itat ds 450 System Remote Starting 00 25 Tachometer dec get fae ne oR ee Ae ESO Re 227 Tailgate das sed eg s p EIE RUE a Y MUS SR 216 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 297 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 227 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 72 76 Tilt Steering Column 0005 156 Tipiotatt sso a shi sda estan ne 4 RN bs 310 Tire and Loading Information Placard 367 377 Tire Identification Number TIN 366 Tire Markings 22x ede kae eoe tes 362 Tire Safety Information 04 362 en INDEX 537 i ERR 84 371 519 Aging Life of Tires sse 376 Air Pressure ssepe i 4 52248 0604 5 544 keda ns 371 CHANSE ae eaa a e TICETINE DR 378 General Information 000005 371 HIg
42. 4 7 Liters 4 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent EUM Ignem 4 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 f Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent I uate Doni 5 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Hogan 15 Utere es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 039 in 99 mm Lower Bank FR8T1332 Gap 0 051 in 1 30 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L and 4 7L En 87 Octane gines Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4
43. 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning as this can cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High
44. A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such
45. Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Side airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear rollover or frontal collisions Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warni
46. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure
47. High Mounted Stop Light 485 Center Lap Belts s iis 05 0 se seed op PER REPRE 49 Center Seat Storage Compartment 194 Certification Label 0 0 0 0 0 0000 396 Chart Tire Sizing s ce huues oo eee ieu 364 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 239 445 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 82 Checks safety nans erpat EnEn REIR he RES 82 Child Restraint 0 0 000 69 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 72 76 Child Seat 2 ced ve uh Baie ee dos 69 74 Cigar Lighter au uu ada aig ee areca ER 187 Cleaning Wheels i3 spes E RU Ge eal E Pn Rit eed 471 Climate Control i iss riesia eR eec 293 Clock aoi erp ob ie de aes 261 262 265 274 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 292 COMPASS a neke sese Ha ase ee a patie dera neca 253 Compass Calibration iiis 254 Compass Variance 6 eee eee 254 Computer Trip Travel 0 00040 252 Conserving Fuels es ied ae e per 251 252 Console Overhead essen 171 Contract Service v9 3 aa deaGedadad a 515 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 461 Cooling System 458 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 460 Coolant Capacity 0 eee eee 488 Coolant Level 2 0 0 00 00 ce eee 458 462 Disposal of Used Coolant 462 Drain Flush and Refill 459 ne INDEX 525 Inspection em ne eme y ieee e e 462 Points
48. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicles s 2 5 oes oo Sota eee ema D aS 513 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 515 Prepare For The Appointment 513 dervice Contract visse ea ae E RS 515 Prepare A List lees 513 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 516 Be Reasonable With Requests 513 BMOPARS Parts ellen 516 H If You Need Assistance sss 513 W Reporting Safety Defects 516 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 514 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 514 AI ahr AS Tae a In Mexico Contact 2 0 00 00 eee eee 514 PCOS saute qa cales ede alle cies 512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE EBENEN Bi Publication Order Forms 517 Traction Grades 0 000000 519 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 0 520 Quality Grades 1 2 02 eee 519 TreadwWedf 2b Ese ek BAS ES 519 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the
49. IOD Spare Yellow CAUTION e When installing the totally integrated power mod ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the totally integrated power module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse located in the Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment The IOD cavity includes a snap in re tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cables from both batteries Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for abou
50. More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since
51. Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station Soft Soft SETUP Button Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B the following items Sports Sports e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow Talk Talk you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control Top 40 Top 40 knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the Weather Weather TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon d TUNE SCROLL contol koob agai 10 save is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM an
52. NOTE In vehicles with 4 7L or 5 7L engines the highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS fea ture is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS 19 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information 20 High Beam Indicator D This indicator shows that headlights are on high beam Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 21 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical system should be serviced NOTE e If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of the gauge the Check Gauges indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound e The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at vari
53. ODOMETER button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window System Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until SYS TEM displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display anyone of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the hours of engine operation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction OD the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE
54. OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING WARNING Continued e You can be seriously even fatally injured riding in e Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat i a seat with the seatback reclined Do not ride with back to swing dump forward on manual recliner seats Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating the handle The seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury This dump feature allows access to the storage bin behind the seat To avoid injury place your hand on the seatback and actuate the handle then posi tion the seatback in the desired position the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest If you ride in this position the shoulder harness will no longer be restraining you In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked Continued 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the event of a rear impact Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical at least to the level of the ears To lower the head restraint push in the button and then push down on the head restraint Head Restraints Eight Way Power Seats If Equipped The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the front seat cushions The power se
55. Quad Cab and Crew belts DR Cab front center seating position have combination lap Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to using a seat belt properly lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature Continued allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and belts are designed to go around the large bones of adjust the seat your body These are the strongest parts of your 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front body and can take the forces of a collision best seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the your injuries in a collision much worse You might webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out your lap of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single
56. Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section E STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Shifting Procedure NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again If all the requirements to select a
57. Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported
58. SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SCROLL control knob to the right or left
59. STARTING AND OPERATING PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle NOTE The Brake Warning Light will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake is applied You must be sure that the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle 054105820 Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear b
60. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Child Protection Door Lock disengage the child protection locks When the system on To provide a safer environment for children riding in the a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using rear seat the rear doors if equipped of your vehicle the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in have the child protection door lock system the unlocked position 022605851 022605852 Child Protection Door Lock Location To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade screwdriver or emergency key and rotate the dial counterclockwise to engage the lock and clockwise to Child Lock Control 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle Power Window Switches 1 Left Front 3 Right Rear 2 Right Front 4 Left Rear en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a
61. Seats If Equipped 127 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 140 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped 140 E Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 141 Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory sss 141 Memory Position Recall issus 142 To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory sekeseke e ee E Baa dee 143 Self Limiting Control os sesi essaies 144 Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control 144 ll To Open And Close The Hood 145 Bligh EMPIRE 146 Headlights seters sted bow ee aes 147 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 147 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Headlight Delays ci rex 148 Windshield Washers liess 155 Parking Lights And Panel Lights 148 W Tilt Steering Column side e eens 156 Fog Lights If Equipped 148 W Heating Steering Wheel If Equipped 157 Interior Lights llle 149 W Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped Cargo Light secesii tesise Pea eRe ES 150 Adjustment 4 9 is ede de P e des Lights On Reminder 151 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 160 Battery Saver lcs sees eee 151 To Activate 160 Daytime Running Lights DRL To Set
62. Select ERS feature on more severe grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put the trans mission in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOWPLOW NOTE Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow applications WARNING Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli sion resulting in serious injury or death 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND CAUNU MOTORHOME ETC Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can CAUTION cause damage to the vehicle Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal WARNING damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when re
63. Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHAN
64. To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is
65. VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel 13 even ty he BNE band say a prp MS e List Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel a Ed Hp R i d i h hi i e Next Station to select the next station Radio Menu i eneiscnto ROUES CHORUM e Previous Stat
66. YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause th
67. a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Continued 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Continued e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze
68. a Desired Speed iius 161 Meena Only Aid Hest Vehicles beoe 2 Deactivating Electronic Speed Control 161 Multifunction Lever 00 151 To Resume Speed 161 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 154 Visus The Spesd Bellini eese ess se 161 a i a bs To Accelerate For Passing 162 Mist Feature asus vs e ang aie asta e 155 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME H Rear Park Assist If Equipped 163 Rear Park Assist Sensors 163 Rear Park Assist Warning Display 164 Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist 167 Service The Rear Park Assist 168 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist 168 ll Rear Backup Camera If Equipped 168 Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off With Navigation Radio 0 0 170 Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off Without Navigation Radio 170 ll Overhead Console If Equipped 171 Courtesy Reading Lights 172 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 174 Programming HomeLink 175 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 178 Using HomeLink s 178 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button osc cn ied dade soe betas S wars 179 Security i c o RR s EX Ra EE 179 Troubleshootin
69. a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Featur
70. a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an auth
71. and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION Never use a tire with a smaller load index or IF EQUIPPED capacity other than what was originally equipped A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load gers 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 Ibs 91 kg of cargo index could result in tire overloading and failure Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle You could lose control and have an accident will be found on the face of the driver s door CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING EE alerts Use Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE CAUTION Continued Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0 5 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains on front wheels o
72. audio volume e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Redial Towing Assistance Last See Number Phonebook See Setup on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Main Menu UConnect Tutorial pe E Ee Francais Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Delete Entries Listed one Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note
73. axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP in this section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slipping wheels to provide optimal forward traction Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis tances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of BAS you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 352 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction a
74. back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 776 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL Towing and Hauling with HSA The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer unless the TOW HAUL switch located on the center stack is selected When activated the TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster For more information on the TOW HAUL mode refer to When To Use TOW HAUL under Automatic Transmission in this section In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill 354 STARTING AND OPERATING EE the system recognizes when the TOW HAUL switch is WARNING Continued e HSA is nota parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
75. been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys can be performed at an authorized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE e When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho rized dealer e If a programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed Customer Key Programming Programming of RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following condit
76. case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section of the owner s manual The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe tur
77. device to Continued 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss the main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles The transfer case must be in the neutral position and the transmission must be in PARK to tow a 4 Wheel Drive vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 for instructions on shifting the transfer case to the neutral position The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transfer case 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the LOCK position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground Speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe damage to the transmission If the vehicle is to be towed faster than 30 mph 50 km h or more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground It may also be towed on a flatbe
78. driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact i
79. during a recall S 1 or 2 or pressing any one of the power seat buttons pressing the adjustable pedals button or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter when not in the ignition switch When a recall is can celled the driver s seat and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected NOTE Achime sound may be heard if setting memory was inhibited for any reason To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release the memory SET button located on the driver s seat 3 Within 10 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat Steps 1 3 for each RKE trans mitter NOTE The capability to link RKE transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory The capability to link RKE transmitters to memory can be disabled or later re enabled by an authorized dealer For 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M vehicles equipped with the Electronic vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC refer to Customer Programmable Features SETUP under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 3 Self Limiting Control The memory system includes a self limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and adjustable pedal moveme
80. e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working
81. e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The re
82. eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Lights Fluid Leaks Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel while you work the controls Check turn signal and high engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline beam indicator lights on the instrument panel fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or I brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be Door latches located and corrected immediately Check for positive closing latching and locking UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
83. for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or i confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon ML oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious s Hood dosed injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e HAZARD switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHI
84. fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis struc ture or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK With four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer so that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are
85. in NEUTRAL until the light goes off For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se vere transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature Indicator under continued operation could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 31 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert in the Occupant Re straints section for more information 32 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off
86. inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
87. ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require speciall
88. into NEUTRAL cates that shift requirements have not been met from the 4WD AUTO if equipped position WARNING e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until one second elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of step 3 key ON are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the one second time then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash con tinuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition key must be ON for a transfer case shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driv
89. items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or te
90. knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations e Lower left and lower right of the center stack without floor mounted shifter e Inside the top storage tray with floor mounted shifter vay M J Power Outlet Floor Shifter e Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment if equipped A lt Power Outlet Upper Lid e Rear of the center console storage compartment Quad Cab or Crew Cab UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Power Outlet Rear Center Console The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply power when the key is in the ON RUN or ACC posi tions All accessories connected to the outlet s should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to a
91. lock to release the window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED Unfolding the Load Floor Quad Cab models with a 60 40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor WARNING Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor While driving or in an accident you 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position Y P may experience abrupt stopping rapid acceleration or sharp turns Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants resulting in serious or fatal injury Unfolding The Load Floor 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE m 2 Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under the load floor unfolds into position the Seat 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position 2 Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor 3 Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor WARNING Do not drive with the load floor in the up position When stopping fast or in an accident the load floor could move to the down position causing serious Load Floor In Open Position injury 3 Reverse the procedure to store the load floor UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 PICKUP BOX Rambox If Equipped The Rambox system is an integrated pickup box storage a
92. nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YO
93. oe 448 489 Capacity eee eshe tee X ER REI e gas 488 Change Interval ac secre e Races 449 Dipstick sess raene tenrai REA RUP 448 Disposal Sasso eger Pis pem i Ede 450 Fiten estos eO pto ete es ee a 450 489 Filter Disposal 000 0000 006 450 Identification Logo secese aspre nin uam enii 449 Materials Added to ce cerises scsrsrierat 450 Pressure Gauge 230 Recommendation Ls 449 488 SynthetiC a Ces hee che Peed EAE RH oud ties 450 Viscosity is bur eS ESO A LESER 449 488 Onboard Diagnostic System 444 445 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 174 Operating Precautions 0 005 444 ne INDEX 533 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 0 94 OverdtVe 2220 4 ma d Edd he bw de aed 317 324 Overdrive OFF Switch 04 317 324 Overhead Console sls 171 Overheating Engine i es ks soe er nn 228 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4517 Panic Alarm accessere rea wate a Pug 24 Park Sense System Rear 000000 163 Parking Brake ss saprati enin R 346 Passing Light 2 0 0 rsss ierias 153 Pedals Adjustable ios ies puisan nes da ne ea 158 Personal Settings sadi ssassn y e a 255 Pets 2 CTUM 81 Pets Transporting 6 6 eee eee 81 Phone Cellular 0 0 00 cee eee 99 Phone Hands Free uconnect 99 Pickup Box 4s esae ie Rer ae 203 Placard Tire and L
94. other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check If your vehicle is equipped with a dipstick use the following procedure If your vehicle has a capped dip stick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly The fluid level should be checked when the engine is fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at normal operating tempera ture Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced Fluid Level Check 42RLE 545RFE Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 82 C 180 F This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating 7 temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi ti
95. some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 33 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehic
96. station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 5 Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control ATC while the ATC is in Auto mode 6 Press and release the SET button located on the driver s seat 7 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s seat The next steps must be performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 8 Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory NOTE Achime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason Memory Position Recall NOTE e The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi tions e Not all motors may be moved at one time Please refer to the eight way power seat description in this section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s seat or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s seat or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver s seat
97. sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages 320 STARTING AND OPERATING Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column if equipped or on the floor console if equipped You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK Electronic Range Se
98. system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number f
99. the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those es STARTING AND OPERATING 389 allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in CAUTION Continued Federal and California reformulated gasoline e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition Materials Added To Fuel malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to All gasoline sold in the United States is required to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or contain effective detergent additives Use of additional some light smoke your engine may be out of tune detergents or other additives is not needed under normal or malfunctionin
100. the message Park Assist Dis abled will be displayed on the EVIC when the system has been disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 Service The Rear Park Assist When the Rear Park Assist is defective the EVIC will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message along with a single chime once per ignition cycle The Park Assist display will also light the red LEDs indicating a problem Under this condition the Rear Park Assist will not operate If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after mak ing sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer Cleaning The Rear Park Assist Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors you could damage the sensors REAR BACKUP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED The Rear Camera system allows you to see an on screen image located in the screen of your uconnect tunes radio of the rear of your vehicle whenever it is put into REVERSE The camera is located next to the tailgate handle on the rear of the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING CAUTION Continued Drivers must be careful when backing up even when To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be using the Rear Camera System Always check care driven slowly when using th
101. the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from 4 AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ig
102. the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in
103. the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 386 STARTING AND OPERATING The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses CT KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L and 4 7L Engine All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations 87 and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un B00dfab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 5 7L Engine The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unl
104. these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher teer Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Placement of the jack e When changing a front wheel place the scissors jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below j ids 6 4X4 Jacking Location e Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench The t
105. to Remember llle 462 Pressure Cap 2 43 ess ede d ek ERR netepi 461 Radiator Cap ise ch Re RE RR eds 461 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 459 488 489 Cruise Control Speed Control 160 Cupholders serne tinea i ERE RE Re ES 189 Customer Assistance eee eee 513 Data Recorder Event llle 67 Daytime Running Lights 151 Dealer Service 0 0 0 eee 447 Defroster Rear Window 199 Defroster Windshield 84 295 301 Delay Intermittent Wipers 154 Differential Limited Slip 0 339 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 467 Power Steering ides sn dU Rn i s isss 345 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 462 Door Locks 5 222122 b PR bade 29 Door Opener Garage 0 0 00 eee eee 174 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water ss sees e eee ritis 341 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 251 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 290 E85 Fuel eee IRR eR EE 390 Electric Rear Window Defrost 199 Electrical Power Outlets 0004 183 Electronic Brake Control System 350 Anti Lock Brake System lius 350 Brake Assist System 0000 351 Electronic Stability Program 356 Traction Control System Electronic Range Select ERS 526 INDEX ae Electronic Speed Contro
106. to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Lu No program type or un ad Mong Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 16 Digit Character station with the same selected Music Type name The rogram Type Display Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the
107. to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Wheel Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp 384 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light located in the instrument cluster will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system f
108. to x and turn on to keep windows clear e Set the mode control to the sf position If windshield fogging starts to occur move the control towards the 3 position 8000cb71 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures Lares ee Resa ene xe Normal Starting 00 Automatic Transmission If Engine Fails To Start After Starting 22e ile dp px R3 lll Engine Block Heater If Equipped Bl Automatic Transmission sse Key Ignition Park Interlock Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 311 311 312 312 313 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override iiis hand oe eee uA Four Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped resres shoes m Five Speed Automatic Transmission It Equipped 22 0 fb ee mes ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped Shifting Procedure 000 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped 333 Shifting Procedure 04 337 Bl Limited Slip Differential If Equipped 339 H Driving On Slippery Surfaces 340 E Driving Through Water
109. transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings
110. vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the transmission shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 WARNING WARNING Continued e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury Rocking the vehicle too violently or revving the engine too high may cause serious injury or death to people near the vehicle EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use tow truck hookup or highway towing You could both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage your vehicle damage to the vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury p i r ot death ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing
111. whenever the four wheel drive mode is auto matically engaged 4WD AUTO 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10 SERV Service 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV four wheel drive system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information 11 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the center stack upper switch bank This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected TOW HAUL 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 13 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi o mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 14 Oil Pressure Gauge If Equipped The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engi
112. whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System to perform the following functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes
113. with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconn
114. your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drive train 404 STARTING AND OPERATING All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is
115. your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Odometer Trip Odometer under In strument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BENENEEEEEEEEMMMMMMCCC NN Check all lights and o
116. 1 Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the back of the front fog lamp housing CAUTION 2 Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector e Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it from the fog lamp bulb with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other Rotate the bul lockwise 1 oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result o POE B IDXORUMGIOOOEIISE 2 urtoinloce tie bulb from the housing Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the housing overheat and cause damage to the lamp the bulb socket or the lamp wiring CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it NOTE There are access covers over both headlamp bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing if equipped These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamps 2 Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side panel 1 Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheetmetal 073306034 073306035 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 3 Disconnect the wiring harness connector fr
117. 326 STARTING AND OPERATING E NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant antifreeze are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL switch when the transmission is sufficiently warm will dem onstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Four wheel drive trucks are equipped with a electroni cally shifted transfer case Refer to the operating instruc tions for your transfer case located in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel NEUTRAL 051905705
118. 4WD LOW NEUTRAL or a five mode position QWD AWD AUTO AWD LOCK 4WD LOW NEUTRAL transfer case If you have a four wheel drive vehicle and want to determine which transfer case is on your vehicle and how to operate it refer to the Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section All Two Wheel Drive Vehicles and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles in 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK Modes Can Choose the Following ESP Operating Modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD 4WD AUTO 4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral back to 4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or ESP Off for specific reasons as noted below ESP Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the norma
119. 5 en INDEX 539 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 223 227 Warnings and Cautions 004 6 Warranty Information 06 516 Washers Windshield LL 155 454 Washing Vehicle keen e ex dea gee 470 Water Driving Through 0 0 0 eee 341 Wheel and Wheel Trim o curare sreneris sanas 471 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 471 Wheel Nut Torque 431 Wind BuftehibS acsi uc PRSE 37 183 Window Fogging aa s 406 04 shane res 303 Windows aE ae SE a L E ee ees 34 POWet 6434 02 prer RR OSS e AUR E e E os 34 Rear Sliding si raseras ingropati RR 200 Windshield Defroster anaana 84 Windshield Washers 154 155 454 Find eneee e h a a Gee S 154 454 Windshield Wiper Blades 454 Windshield Wipers os cne surns Tresiepaa rgs 154 Wiper Blade Replacement 454 Wipers Intermittent 00 00 0000 eu 154 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to bo
120. 7 Det Hi Pee DIN a ea capa nats 2e ll Rambox Safety Warning 38 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 Safety Warning o oo eee 38 PG a Nags o Occupant Restraints 0000 39 General Information 0 25 Lap Shoulder Belts see 41 M Remote ireng E EQU DEN ee ea e Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 49 HOW TO Vee RESIS yotar eeina i Center Lap Belts 252 eorr ms 49 Ri dr ICE 29 Automatic Locking Relatos AER Mode Manual Door Locks 004 29 IE Equipped seme re 50 Power Door Locks If Equipped 30 Seat Belt Pretensioners 51 Child Protection Door Lock i i 33 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert8 cece cea eom 51 M Windows een 34 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 52 Child Restraint 2 0 cree RES 69 Seat Belt Extender 0004 52 W Engine Break In Recommendations 81 Driver And Right Front Passenger W Safety Te sepii dae eee ne dade giia ox aes 82 LM oM pud Ld pan p EMEN 53 Transporting Passengers sss 82 Airbag System Components 54 Exhaust GaSe 24 4 6204 es si brasem rti 83 Advanced Front Airbag Features 55 o ail HM i AE ici ga Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 60 Periodic Saf
121. Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Transfer Case NVG 246 Only MOPAR NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Front Axle Four Wheel Drive GL 5 SAE 75W 90 MS 9763 or equivalent Models Rear Axle MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 140 MS 8985 Limited Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 118 ml 4 oz MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emissions Control System Maintenance 492 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 492 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N it E S C H E D U L E S 8 492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability
122. Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Devices Message Announcement English Espanol or Francais Select phone to be deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no uconnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHIC
123. BIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact The supplemental seat side airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Label When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 022606595 Side Curtain Airbag Label Location NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where
124. CLE Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but The controls for the power mirrors are located on the tons and a four way mirror control switch driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Controls Power Mirror Controls 1 Mirror Select Buttons 2 Mirror Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the Heated Mirrors If Equipped mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear that you want the mirror to move window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If B Equipped The outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The outside mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts 030405625 Power Mirror Movement 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped Slide On Rod Features of Sun Visor If Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor Equipped To use the mirror rot
125. CLE 27 Remote Start Abort Message on Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Aborted System Fault The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the on
126. CROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push
127. Curtains SABIC if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Advanced Front Airbag Features WARNING The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver NING and front passenger airbags This system provides output e Do not put anything on or around the airbag appropriate to the severity and type of collision as covers or attempt to open them manually You may determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC damage the airbags and you could be injured which may receive information from the impact sensors because the airbags may no longer be functional at the front of the car The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Supplemental Seat Side Airbags If Equipped Supplemental seat side airbags provide enhanced protec tion and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SA
128. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Center Storage Compartment If Equipped WARNING The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats The storage compartment e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the provides an armrest and contains both and upper and armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle lower storage area operation or an accident Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright In an accident the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about en dangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to With the upper lid closed pull on the lower handle to raise the cover The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt open the lower storage bin power outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices refer to Electrical Power Outlets in this Section for more information 035305808 Lower Storage Bin 035305807 Upper Storage Compartment 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Equipped In floor storage bins are located in front of the second row seats and can be used for extra storage The storage bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for clean
129. Equipped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settings e When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode operation Auto blower operation is set by using rotary knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and down but tons e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e SYNC feature links the temperature controls the pas senger side temperature becomes the same as the temperature selected by the driver The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers o 00 000 Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 045605681 1 Blower Control 9 DEFROST 2 Left Temperature Up 10 Right Temperature Down 3 SYNC Indicator 11 A C 4 Left Temperature Indicator 12 A C Indicator 5 Right Temperature Indica 13 SYNC Temperature Button tor 6 DELAY Indicator 14 Left Temperature Down 7 Right Temperature Up 15 RECIRCULATE 8 MODE es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Automatic Operation 1 Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posi tion on the ATC Panel
130. FORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event th
131. Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Integrated Power Module 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBDII This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immedi ate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Mes
132. ING AND OPERATING Se into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared In this mode ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP Off is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW the ESP system will be in this mode WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESP Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com
133. ING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER Inner LED 79 in 200 cm Yellow Yes Half Second 1st LED 51 1 in 130 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 45 2 in 115 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 3 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 5th LED 20 in 50 cm 27 6 in 70 cm Yellow None 6th LED 16 in 40 cm 19 7 in 50 cm Red Yes Intermittent 7th LED 6 in 15 cm 11 81 in 30 cm Red Yes Continuous NOTE The Rear Park Assist will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even e Before using the Rear Park Assist it is strongly when using the Rear Park Assist Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots be fore backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer t
134. LE 127 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When you press the VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system whi
135. NELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following console between the courtesy reading lights two conditions E 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before th
136. NG YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to comm
137. NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside Lever If Equipped the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergency inside of the bin by pulling on the glow in the dark lever Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism I ium OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passen gers Front seat belt pretensioners if equipped Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Es n Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e All seat belt systems except driver s and second row center position include Automatic Locking Retractors ALR If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity
138. NT PANEL Se As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctio
139. NTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based c
140. O BA Q7 A D 9 e W T Duane WENDSHIELD MASTER L G TW LOW EAM KEY ACTWATE UPPER ANO LOWER HEATED SEAT MC THRE PRESSURE MIA DESCENT when FARO WASHER mo Ome Am OTET MONTA COWTWOL BRAKE P 4 B AWD 3 se ee ART en as YA 4WD BRAKE a LFTCATE ME EASE ELECTRONIC AAKE SvSTEM Y FANRMLUPTE REARFOGLAMP ARDLSTEATE DEFROSTAMO VENTILATING FAN WINDOW AOCN THROTTLE KQUM EEL WAMAPNG PARKING CONTROL DRINE BRAKE a 3 UD qp KA m e amp Ho Acum W EATER MD Woden WSTRUMENT PANEL COANN SuD aom TRUNA DECA wg CONDITOMNG QD SEAT RI COSRITION SN TOW AA DEFROST ILLUMINATION ang TETHER ANCHOR DUTTON CY er 4 evn rah 2 IQ A i LOWER ANCHORS LOW F U0 POWER ves imei G WR SOE ARSAG AAD BUDG 0006 EMERGENCY LUONTEEN AND TETHER FOR CONNECT MAIARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING LU AND WASHER PELEASE HANDLE COMLOREN LATCH SUTTA DPE LOW SRS e AIC C Q E 598 7b hommes Om n 8 MALF NON TRANS ENTRE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL MASSANGIR D008 ALAM CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE row REE OWNERS UNGT An tLGECTRONC macau Ol TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAWTSYETEM WREAG OFF TOP DOWN TOR MANGALHO CONDITIOMEN STADRUTY contam OFF 010507683 6 INTRODUCTION Se WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire
141. ODUCTION 4 55 3x dn oi RI HRORR RERO RH RUROR ai ie id oar RERO shies ar ACRIOR CR CRESCE aa Bese eniin 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece hh hn tn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee hn nn la UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eeesessecssecseccoecsecoecseccseeo 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 ccc ccc cece SEENE EEEREN EEEE hh hh nnn 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 2c cece cece ccc c cece ehh hh hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cc ccc cece ccc c ccc r cere e cree e ree t hh ht 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 cece c ccc c ccc eee i mnn IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 0 cece ccc c cece eer cere e eee mn 10 INDEX ceritain EDU INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Mi Introduction 0 00 00 00004 4 WiVanConversions Campers 00 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 6 WH Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workman ship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It
142. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 2 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat 3 Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat 4 Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center seat and attach the hooks to the anchor loop 5 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and to the anchor directly behind the right seat Il 6 Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 022605551 may Deke Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab Crew Cab 1 Inner Anchor Loops 2 Snap Hook 3 Tether Strap 4 Passenger s Side Rear Child Seat 5 Rear Center Child Seat 6 Driver s Side Rear Child Seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat
143. OUR VEHICLE 75 We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap port
144. Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files 261 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode Bl Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped REN RER RES Radios Only System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 272 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 292 Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode sig 2e e vu ad eR RE AO Napa red ios 286 Satellite Antenna 000 286 Reception Quality 00 287 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode lees 287 Operating Instructions uconnect phone IF Equipped sss e 289 li Video Entertainment System VES IE Equipped x needs RET a aes 290 ll Remote Sound System Controls It Equipped 4 ss RR Rr RR es 291 Radio Operation 04 291 CD Player s cerco e rem Se ae ae 292 E CD DVD Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones Bl Climate Controls Manual Heating And Ai
145. RAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information e SERV 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV 4wD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required e Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible e Transmission Temperature Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g sn
146. RE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 AEE AEE EEEE EEEE Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START Integrated Ignition Key The Integrated Key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the RKE transmitter The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the OFF position and then remove the key NOTE To remove the emergency key from the RKE transmitter slide the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmit ter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power WINDOW switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power WINDOW switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will r
147. RNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water or is periodic maintenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued 452 MAINTAINING
148. S Refer to Section 3 for more information 3 HEATED STEERING WHEEL Refer to Section 3 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE OMe db bbe 040305952 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 100 a Wd 1 0 r1 gt Messages 0 Units English ulii es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either 1 Tach s indicator remains on and does not flash or flashes at a dbi d MAG rapid rate The Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute 3 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the CAUTION ON position Do not operate the engine with the tachometer 4 Temperature Gauge pointer at high RPM for extended periods Engine The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera damage may occur ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 2 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to NOTE exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range e Acontinuo
149. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting Installing the Child Restraint System WARNING Do not install child restraint systems equipped with LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad Cab or Crew Cab model rear seat The LATCH anchorages in this seat are designed for the two outboard seating positions only A child may be placed in the rear center seating position of a Quad Cab or Crew Cab model using the seat belt and child tether anchorage Failure to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING Y
150. TRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be depressed to shift out of PARK 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key briefly WARNING to the START position and release it The starter motor e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into will continue to run but will automatically disengage the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to when the engine is running start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done i
151. TRUMENT PANEL 257 Remote Unlk Sequence When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactiva
152. UR VEHICLE es s ENS aeons You will want to have the airbags ready to Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate the airbag system is designed to be mainte accidentally or may not function properly if modi nance free if any of the following occurs have fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho an authorized dealer service the system immediately rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach switch is first turned ON ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized e The light remains on after the approximate four to dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso six second interval ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili The light comes on and remains on while driving ties contact your authorized dealer NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label E THINGS TO KNOW BE
153. ace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 504 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires filter JJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Flush and replace the engine coolant if J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary not done at 60 months J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 505 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oi
154. ainers Regular Cab Models 198 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x ll Rear Window Features 04 199 Bed Rail Tie Down System 214 Rear Window Defroster x rre 199 B Slide ter Campers a essor tes Ces 216 Power Sliding Rear Window Camper Applications sllsss 216 eS a le ae 200 Easy ON Tailgate 000 000 cece 216 Manual Sliding Rear Window Disconnecting The Rear Camera PIED Pon ees ewer et ase he sea n If Equipped LuseresxerssiseraPessid e 216 H Fold Flat Load Floor If Equipped 201 Removing Tha TAEAE x vases ee evens 217 B Pickup Box sure su rr Rh t Orekan 203 Rockne Talpa IE Bduippod us eec 218 Rambox If Equipped 203 Bed Extender If Equipped 207 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control lever under the mirror to the night position lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 The mirror should be adjusted with the lever set in the day position lever flipped toward the windshield The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped CAUTION This m
155. and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued 342 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s
156. and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they WARNING can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the riding in these areas are more likely to be seri inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should ously injured or killed be belted at all times Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Lap Shoulder Belts vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat All seating positions except the
157. ange is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance ha
158. anufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor 9 mance 520 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a sp
159. ar 1 First This range is for hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Overdrive Operation The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth gear OVERDRIVE The transmission will automatically shift from third gear to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e the transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into OVER DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until the transmission cools down After the transmission cools down the transmission will res
160. ar your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in a vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Removing Slack From Belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt syste
161. arage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN NELS Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal It is also advised to park outside the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC
162. ard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Se have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information As an example assume your vehicle has a recommended cold tire inflation placard pressure parked for more than 3 hours of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using rep
163. arm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme right posi tion e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the extreme left position 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors activate the Panic Alarm or Remote Start the vehicle if equipped from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held radio transmitter with inte grated key The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the RKE transmitter with integrated key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 020207434 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter with Integrated Key To Unlock
164. as are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped WARNING Both front seats are independently adjustable forward or rearward and are equipped with a seatback recliner The Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could found at the front edge of each seat cushion Pull up on cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be the handle and slide the seat forward or backward to properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust move the seat into the most comfortable position any seat only while the vehicle is parked 030905746 Manual Seat Adjuster 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion and is used to adjust the seatback position To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back on the seatback and release the handle at the desired position To return the seatback lift upward on the handle lean forward and release the handle at the desired position 030905747 Recline Handle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
165. as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the RETURN button to exit Customer Programmable Features SETUP Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup displays in the EVIC 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scro
166. assis plug and bracket provided in the ing inward in the locking tab glove box to the chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket back into the sill 5 Connect the tailgate plug provided in the glove box to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals do not corrode 6 Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the forward facing surface of the tailgate This will prevent damaging the connector and bracket when storing or reinstalling the tailgate Removing the Tailgate 036906362 1 Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera if Locking Tab equipped refer to Disconnecting the Rear Camera If 3 Disconnect the chassis wiring harness ensuring the Equipped above connector bracket does not fall into the sill 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot 036905824 Locking Tang 3 Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot clears the hanger bracket 4 Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot 5 Remove the tailgate from the vehicle NOTE Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box WARNING To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks Locking Tai
167. at an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable light stat
168. at switch can be moved forward and backward as well as up and down to control the position of the seat The power seatback switch is used to adjust the angle of the seatback to position yourself in the most comfortable driving position Push forward or rearward on the switch and the seatback will move in either direction UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 CAUTION Do not put anything under a power seat It may cause damage to the seat or the seat controls 030905752 Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Switch 2 Power Seatback Switch 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Lumbar If Equipped The lumbar controls are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion The lumbar support can be increased by pressing the front of the switch and decreased by press ing the back of the switch Lumbar Control Switch Heated Seats If Equipped Both front seats and rear passenger seats can be equipped with heaters The switches for the front seats are located in the instrument panel under the climate controls The switches for the rear passenger seats are located on the back of the center console After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Er 030905580 Press the switch once to select Hi
169. ate the sun visor down and swing The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on auto tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the matically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light sun To use the Slide On Rod feature rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it Pull the sun visor along the Slide On Rod until the sun visor is in the desired posi tion Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod Extender uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for uconnect phone operating instruc tions for these radios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for sup ported phones For uco
170. atisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 372 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for sig
171. ault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that affects ra dio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 6 Loss of communication with the tire pressure moni toring sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a non matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 1 This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on
172. belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022605555 Airbag and Knee Boltser Location 2 Knee Boltser 1 Driver and Passenger Air bag 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag e Front Passenger Airbag Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable
173. ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 WA
174. bined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light will come on momentarily each time the igni tion switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal The sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation Trailer Sway Control TSC The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro priate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively s
175. bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not WARNING need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal CAUTION operating conditions This can cause a fire if you Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is pants or others flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 27 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to 9 eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition N switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting s
176. camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again Turning the Rear Camera On or Off Without Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED pa The overhead console is located on the headliner above the review mirror The overhead console contains the following features e Courtesy Reading Lights e Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped e Power Sliding Rear Window Switch If Equipped e Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped Overhead Console 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Courtesy Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are a
177. cated on the right of the shift lever gate 1 Turn the key to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab through the access port on the center console 051205828 Interlock Manual Override 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 7 Reinstall the override cover ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Four Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped NOTE Under extremely cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Gear Ranges Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position
178. ce and could result in an accident Incorrect Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 057003769 057003768 EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect Fifth Wheel Hitch The fifth wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed It connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg without added equipment or alter ations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for
179. certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label repres
180. ch mechanism tube Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel 060505395 1 Lower 2 Raise It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with 2 Set the parking brake the jack extension tube only Use of an ai h h iin sare osque Gud ded m M ne 3 Place the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive P 5 vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position winch Preparations 4 Turn the ignition OFF 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or 9 18 OR be Hazard Waring fase slippery areas 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking WARNING position For example if the right front Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the wheel is being changed block the left rear wheel vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 060505162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa Instructions WARNING Carefully follow
181. cking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front outboard seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are de signed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAle
182. ckup Transfer Case 1 0 0 00 00 0000000 ee 466 x ll M aa nets dn X Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Automatic Transmission 466 With Cargo Lamp 0 000 cc cess vee 485 PPPS ale Canepa ProtecHon From W Fluids And Capacities 0 488 Corrmosion a rk e e eae 469 E Fuses L L L L 475 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 489 Totally Integrated Power Module 475 M dM LLL s M Vehicle Storage ey TERP dieere grekera i Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 481 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 071005702 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick If Equipped 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L gun 071305565 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 071405704 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer
183. cle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard ER SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS Ab REAR P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa
184. com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possib
185. commended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive
186. creational towing Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an acci dent Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing of two wheel drive models is not allowed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result in severe transmission damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models WARNING CAUTION You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case NOTE The electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL for recreational towing The trans mission must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL shifting procedure for your vehicle Recreational Towing Procedure Electronic Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Sl UES Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that recreational towing the
187. ction lever inward to the second detent Washer fluid will be sprayed until the washer knob is released from this position If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed for a period greater than one second while in the off position the wiper will cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is released To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the multifunction lever Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place Tilt Steering Lever 031605589 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjus
188. ctivated Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The Fuel Saver Mode message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Easy Exit Seat When this feature is selected it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when enter ing and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed in reverse gear the side mirrors tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Start Comfo
189. cured too Continued 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof To close the sunroof from the vented position press forward on the sunroof switch Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as
190. d 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
191. d 147 High Beam sericea conti eee 153 234 High Beam Indicator 0 0 234 High Beam Low Beam Select 153 Illuminated Entry 0 0 00 0000 19 Instrument Cluster 0 0005 223 227 Interior 2 3 ed ee es Race eee a 149 172 Lights On Reminder smesse i emesa ees 151 LOW FUEL ote ireti pae ER ed ep ale bes 234 ee INDEX 531 OIL Pressure 2a a honk a ates A ace we ME ae e 237 Passi sain dein d aad maids Soy e RE as 153 Seat Belt Reminder llus 242 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 230 OerVIiCe iyu Race busy RW Ea NUR 481 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 230 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 237 Traction Control 0 0 00 ee ee 357 Turn Signal 9 cere Gee een es 85 152 481 484 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 223 227 Limited Slip Differential 339 465 Loading Vehicle s eod ails eae a ae 396 Tires uns a Sah hee ee ak a Yue cR 367 LOCKS uae Gi A Geos ro ra ex ea ae be 29 Child Protecti n ssec RR bRY EGG 33 DOOR sec ha ce e RS URGERE CA ESEX RSS 29 Power Door sonsaina e 0c ee 30 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH a deca Gia eye as apart a dtr Wa sake 72 Lubrication Body Sectra sessies ee 453 Lug Nuts cima Rae arbe Rd aie Rae akita 431 Maintenance leere 447 Maintenance Free Battery 451 Maintenance Procedures liuius 447 Maintenance Schedule
192. d FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 E MT Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD CAUTION label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the only The use of other sized discs may damage the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than CD player mechanism 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel ejected before a new disc can be loaded away and jam the player mechanism If you insert a disc wit
193. d engine oil filter E T Change the engine oil and engine oil 2 Rotate the tires N filter Q If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the A T Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary N T Inspect the front and rear axle fluid J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary C change if using your vehicle for police L Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary S towing H H E D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate the tires m If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessa
194. d odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle FLEXIBLE FUEL 4 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve hicles FFV only These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those E STARTING AND OPERATING 391 CAUTION subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can gasoline only powered vehicles operate on E 85 81ae46a9 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 8576 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov
195. d or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 3 7L 04 e ees 441 W Maintenance Procedures 447 Bl Engine Compartment 4 7L 442 PCIe OW i3 uaa duae oe ee ee Paca 448 Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L 443 Engine Oll Filtet uua eee ea 450 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 444 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 450 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 444 Maintenance Free Battery 451 7 lll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Air Conditioner Maintenance 452 PrOgramS unes nea Rd ena Re Rei 445 Body Lubrication isses 453 Bl Replacement Parts 446 Windshield Wiper Bladag o cerkario 454 B Dealer Service scier ct eve cies cheese eds 447 Adang Wader ERE cisco rt dace 454 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust Systemi casa ocewx tian Ce x 455 W Bulb Replacement iexcsasceecc re ex 481 Cooling System less 458 Dual Or Quad Headlamp Front Park And Turn Signal If Equipped 481 brake System cope P RAS DUE 463 Reap Axle And Four Wheel Drive Front Fog Lamps 434695 seri e rad terdi s 483 Driving Axle Fluid Level 465 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Ba
196. d with air conditioning keep the front of the e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in cee ean the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake
197. damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and an MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate th
198. des three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress
199. display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 6 Firmly p
200. down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear the first tap down will downshift the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear Another tap down will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear To exit ERS mode press and hold the top of the switch until D is once again highlighted in the instrument cluster display 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 14 1 5 15 Allowed Applies to vehicles equipped with 4 7L and 5 7L engines only NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left down and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Gear Ranges Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position On four wheel drive vehicl
201. dy sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems a a lon ee ee LS Printed in U S A
202. e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook Press the PHONE button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provi
203. e Rear Camera system fully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using the Rear Camera system NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry AUTION e To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera system should only be used as a parking aid The Rear Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path so can result in serious injury or death Continued 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning the Rear Camera On or Off With Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear
204. e brake fluid Seal damage may result Rear Axle And Four Wheel Drive Front Driving Axle Fluid Level For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level position The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole for the manufacturer s C205F HD front axles The fluid level should be 5 8 in 16 mm below the fill hole on 9 1 4 in manufacturer s rear axles Drain and Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Limited Slip Differentials This vehicle requires that 4 oz 118 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Genuine Parts in this sec
205. e certification registration num Power Sunroof Switch ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow WARNING Continued the power sunroof to operate for approximately ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front Do not allow small children to operate the sun door is opened roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening WARNING Injury may result e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving Open Sunroof Express Mode unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous fora Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate number of reasons A child or others could be the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open seriously or fatally injured do not leave the keyin automatically During the Express Open operation any the ignition A child could operate power win movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will dows other controls or move the vehicle remain in a partial open position Again momentarily In an accident there is a greater risk of being pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You Open Feature could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly se
206. e is not allowed T 045605652 e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection by pressing the A C button Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air ems Operation Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A light will illu minate when the A C system is engaged 045605651 MAX A C For maximum cooling when MAX A C is selected the A C is turned on automatically and the air is recircu lated 045605557 NOTE A C cannot be deselected when in MAX A C position The LED will blink three times if the A C button is pushed Automatic Temperature Control ATC If
207. e radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceed ing 50 folders will result in this display 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files
208. e system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit After lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M attention should als
209. e time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key into the ignition swich Once inserted the message Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For more information on Remote Start ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Comfort Sy
210. eaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro v
211. ear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains
212. eat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision Inserting Latch Plate When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the black latch and black buckle 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach Pi Use Foshan the black latch and black buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Press the button located on the upper belt guide and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 022605853 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are
213. eature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you wil
214. ecified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 522 INDEX ae Adding Fuel seresa yeaa RRREREEEES 394 Adjustable Pedals iles 158 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 450 Air Conditioner Maintenance 452 Air Conditioning cioe e pne E ER Y 293 Air Conditioning Controls 293 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 304 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 452 453 Air Conditioning System 293 297 452 Air Pressure Tires 0000005 372 377 Airbag n ies Sb enge ees nd vee 53 63 Airbag Deployment 0 rit muris 64 Airbag Light sie cos advan ness 54 61 66 84 240 Airbag Maintenance 0 00002000 65 Airbagy Side osde e
215. ect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to
216. ed by This electronically shifted transfer case provides five the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch whichis mode positions located on the instrument panel Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive automatic range 4WD AUTO e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD or four wheel drive position AWD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are desi
217. edule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary 0 OC O C O C O O O M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LI Rotate the tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate the tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following
218. ee tad ae Reed 56 60 62 63 Airbag Window Side Curtain 56 60 63 Alarm Light 122 4p EE ERES 230 Alarm Pane pv CR Oh Cen dens 24 Alarm Security Alarm llle 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio ls 286 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 459 460 488 Disposal assess educi CSIRO eR es 462 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 350 Anti Lock Warning Light 241 349 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Anti Theft System neasa i meie cece eee 18 Appearance Care i425 99 iia edis OR Res 469 Ashira yoe tenane oduceun o 64 sete qu tee 187 Assistance Towing cece eee 114 Auto Down Power Windows 35 Automatic Dimming Mirror 94 Automatic Headlights 04 147 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 297 Automatic Transmission lesse 315 Adding Fluid scr R9 468 Fluid and Filter Changes 469 a INDEX 523 Fluid Level Check 0 00005 466 467 Fd Type ey cesta gpl partenza nas ur deb 466 490 Gear Ranges iid S404 ade bos 315 Shif lpg ere seh ah aee Ss oneris i aes 320 Special Additiv s 2 ber 469 Torque Converter 5s does br ae Rs 319 Axle Fluid sises xe Rr Re reb xe 465 490 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 465 Back Up Camera 00 00 00 eee ee eee 168 Battery is
219. ee thee PERE 433 Key Programming 0 0000 e eee ee eee 17 Key Replacement 000040 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 15 Key In Reminder ses ciem Re es ede es Keyless Entry System 530 INDEX MM Keys uei eae dane tansia Rem xw I de RP alae 4 12 Knee Bolster 413 xod P punk ORAE RR a 54 Lane Change and Turn Signals 152 Lap Belts eue EAR baw a Boe PA wd 49 Lap Shoulder Belts scure eeraa ra E AE a 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 00040 72 Latches 2x ou tea ana aa os a aE 85 Leaks Fluid 225263 EG ne 85 Life of Wires 0o cep eT E 376 Light Bulbs sse i bm 85 Lights erem e erue HIE ead 85 146 Airbags icp 23a Gos e ee ea ee oS 54 61 66 84 240 Alarm ereus eaei be eR dT ES 230 Anti Lock iiss ieee a Raa Eee aku 241 Anti Lock Warning 0000200000 349 Automatic Headlights 147 Brake Warning sse ni reader EU n 235 Bulb Replacement 0 0000 481 Cargo sak agateauih Rae dapi Rare ee efe 150 Center Mounted Stop 06 485 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 239 Courtesy Reading 21 44 2400 xe Ree ees 172 Daytime Running 0 00 a eee 151 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 357 PXCCQHOD 153 cy alms poteat ded ete don dtd 85 FO siea tue sca Eee ed WP SCAN wats 148 241 483 Hazard Warning Flasher 420 Headlights 2 44 06 62424284 oe 2e b4 gaa y
220. egistration and title Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Vehicle Identification Number THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys 40 12 Wireless Ignition Node WIN IE Equipped escri lero re Rer 12 Integrated Ignition Key 13 Ignition Key Removal 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 15 Monty Key EN 15 Replacement Keys 000000 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information 00 17 li Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 Rearming Of The System 18 To Set The Alarm sue partis E ERR RS 18 To Disarm The System 18 Bi Illuminated Entry System If Equipped 19 lll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 20 To Unlock The Doors 00 20 To Lock The Doors seres 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Remote Down Window Feature Power Windows If Equipped 34 DCEQUHBBOR seston npud pigana a Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 3
221. either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 NOTE e If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate AWD 4WD a i AUTO LOCK gwo Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the Low shift then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met e The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NEUTRAL Electronically Shifted Transfer Case l Five Position Switch If Equipped Transfer Case Switch Five Position This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operat
222. elerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Deactivating Electronic Speed Control A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever CANCEL toward you will deacti vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed NE memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed raise the Electronic Speed Control lever RESUME ACCEL upwards and release Resume can be used at any speed above 30 mph 50 km h Varying The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is SET speed can be increased by raising and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever upwards When released a new set speed will be established 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Raising the Electronic Speed Control lever RESUME ACCEL upwards once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped upward speed increases so tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set press the Electronic Speed Control lever SET DECEL downward and hold Release the Electronic Speed Con trol lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever SET DECEL downward once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed decrea
223. emain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Refer to Key Off Power Delay under Customer Programmable Features SETUP in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the OFF or ACC position e If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC the EVIC will display Key In Ignition SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocke
224. engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 DRIVING OFF ROAD Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously If you must back down a hill back straight down using REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago nally across the hill When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving NOTE After off road u
225. ent of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automati cally There are six fixed blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position 045605986 Blower Control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control knob The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air i
226. ents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR 398 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier
227. er compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler 045605557 temperatures Rotating the knob clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045605650 Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlet
228. er by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 516 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment whe
229. ere are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weig
230. ervoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reser voir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed up operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield MOPAR All Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Whenever a ch
231. es Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area
232. es be sure that the transfer case is in a DRIVE position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING Continued REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this e Your vehicle could move and injure you and others tange only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever back and forth without first NEUTRAL pulling it toward you after you have set it in This range is for when the vehicle is standing for pro PARK Make sure it is in PARK before leaving the longed periods with the engine running The engine may vehicle be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK leave the vehicle or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than DRIVE idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake This range provides all forward gears including third pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward gear direct and fourth or fifth gear overdrive Refer to or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle Overdrive Operation Use this range for most city and and hit someone or something Only shift into highway driving gear when the engine is idling normally and
233. es within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 17 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi CUR tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information 18 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission
234. eshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid loss will damage internal parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E Hazard Warning Flasher 420 WB Jacking And Tire Changing 420 Jack Location 4 9 ne e ED 421 Removing The Spare Tire 426 Preparations 625 ees ae a mex 427 Instructions llle 428 M Hoisting isse ee 433 B jump Starting Procedures H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle With Portable Starting Unit ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped H Towing A Disabled Vehicle 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE HAZARD WARNING FLASHER JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the WARNING upper switch bank just below the radio e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will co
235. essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion for proper tire replacement procedures Replac ing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and
236. essure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining
237. estraints 0 llle 136 Headlights s eszsckere ev e oriita et oe 481 Automate rasga shane aly aah A RAE oes 147 Cleaning uaa dee ep EA oe aS a 473 High Beam 24s 40624 ERR ERR Rs 153 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 153 Lights On Reminder less 151 Passimg ii E ed eeu ERRARE Rey etas 153 WUC PEUT 147 ee INDEX 529 Heated Mirrors Heated Seats Heater Heater Engine Block High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch Hitches Trailer Towing Hoisting HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter Hood Release 0 0 cee eee 145 TENHON 22cm mecs ERU PER ESSE 3 14 Key rereana age vue ce Reges ux c RU 8S 12 14 Ignition Key Removal lesse 14 Illuminated Entry llseleeeeesse 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 2005 15 Infant Restraint llle 69 Inflation Pressure Tires 000000005 377 Information Center Vehicle 05 244 Inside Rearview Mirror 00 93 Instrument Cluster 223 225 227 Instrument Panel and Controls 222 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 474 Integrated Power Module Fuses 475 Interior Appearance Care 0005 472 Interior Lights 55e mes 149 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 154 Introduction isses se Rex e ee Rex cama 4 Inverter Outlet 115V 0 eee eee 188 Jack Location 1 ee ees 420 Jump Staring cese peter e
238. ety Checks You Should Make Event Data Recorder EDR 67 Outside The Vehicle lesus 84 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Remote Keyless Entry RKE with Integrated Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter with integrated ignition key and a Wireless Igni tion Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided standard blade key into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN If Equipped The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFO
239. exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate f
240. ey were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Hill Start Assist HSA When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to HSA Hill Start Assistance under Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 of this manual for system function and operating information To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been dea
241. f 4x2 vehicles Type S specifications NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Continued on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of 4X2 model trucks NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted with P245 70R17 tires only SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the
242. f the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for wh
243. f your child opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate restraint from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it the buckle with the release button facing out has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant
244. fforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle
245. fore attempting a jump start Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the Rv With Portable Starting Unit Snes eet Veee wiih FISCH battery There are many types of these units available Follow the m 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above manufacturer s instructions for necessary precautions sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan and operation 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION It is very important that the starting unit operating voltage does not exceed 12 Volts DC or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap plying slight pressure to the accelerator CAUTION Revving the engine and shifting aggressively be tween forward and reverse may damage the vehicle and lead to extensive repair In general the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the
246. fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner N63 LOW FUEL P System Info Messages L i RE Z mi sea ii T Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Trip Functions Press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the OOOMETER TRIP
247. g Tips 06 179 General Information 4 180 ower Sunroof If Equipped 180 Open Sunroof Express Mode 181 Closing Sunroof Express 182 Pinch Protect Feature 06 182 Pinch Protect Override 182 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Venting Sunroof Express 182 Sunshade Operation 0 0 182 Wind Bufteting eser RR E 183 Sunroof Maintenance 183 Sunroof Fully Closed sesers perseris sdi 183 H Electrical Power Outlets 2 ccr REY 183 li Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver It Equipped eres mb te Ren 187 ll Power Inverter If Equipped 188 B Cupholders usos exer e e es 189 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats 2 2 ee eee 189 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Mounted Shifter rss der nidra sa 190 Rear Cupholder Quad Cab 190 Rear Cupholder Crew Cab 191 iurc PC 191 Glove Box Storage Door Storage Center Storage Compartment It Equipped 23d E ees 194 Second Row In Floor Storage Bin ItEquipped 5 2 rm RE Rx 196 SeatbackStorage aeaee ma 197 Storage Regular Cab 197 Storage And Seats Crew Cab 198 Plastic Grocery Bag Ret
248. g and may require immediate conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There service Contact your authorized dealer for service fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel assistance Fuel System Cautions The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended CAUTION Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Continued Systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk liftgate swing gate closed when monoxide a colorless an
249. g to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not i
250. gh level heating Press the switch a sec ond time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 NOTE The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate The heated seats switch from High to Low and from Low to Off automatically based on time and temperature of the seat The heated seats can operate on High heat for as little as 4 minutes and up to 30 minutes before switching to Low heat Once a seat has switched to the Low heat setting it may operate for an additional 60 minutes before automatically shutting Off The heated seats can shut Off early or may not turn on when the seat is already warm NOTE The drivers heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Section 2 for further informa tion WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ventilated Seats If Equipped
251. gned for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 2WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD 4LOW and 4WD AUTO are located on the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case posi tion the position indicator lights will do the following If all shift conditions are met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If one or more shift conditions are not met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
252. h 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt For further information refer to www seatcheck org ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for Improper installation can lead to failure of an weight and height limits infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex not work when you need it actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the used in a rear seat lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path Here are some tips for getting the most out o
253. h Speed edis e peike ege dere e ees 374 Inflation Pressures lt irec certa tereni tari 372 Life of Tires 222939 csr iimo he aes 376 Load Capacity ai isses we Rn 367 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 381 Pressure Warning Light 237 Quality Grading 000 519 Radial 2 52 x y hacks he ea eR YU be 374 Replacement use ue ates wih ae dates as 376 Rotati l ies RE ean dee se aed bak da 379 Safety eed kr eee e Rs 362 371 SIZES ivi do x RUE NOR RR SCARE Re xo 364 Snow TIPS uua dup BS BR Ce he RR TR ep 379 SPINNE 3 cogor ei Eur as asi alk Rn un V do a 374 Tread Wear Indicators sls 375 Wheel Nut Torque 431 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 404 Torque Converter Clutch lt sso acest eatas 319 325 Tow Hooks Emergency 0000 0000 437 TOWING iu dnce a seg Pardee aa RNS deka Ca 399 24 Hour Towing Assistance 5 114 Disabled Vehicle 0 000000 05s 437 Gilde eawuag Se A STE War Bie ated 404 Recreational llle 412 Weight ite sdb env ERE Ped 404 Towing Assistance ressa igri r ata 114 TEACHON dob che awit ae oA week eae eee a ERE IGOES 340 Traction Control 00000000088 230 351 Trailer Sway Control TSC 040 361 Trailer Towing llle Cooling System Tips 004 THICNES 5 zou aco ee qed tard De Un te bane DE RUN Minimum Requirements 538 INDEX ees Trailer and Tongue Weight
254. h the ignition ON and the radio RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and a second CD if one is already loaded begin to play when you insert the disc The display will Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the show the track number and index time in minutes and other side is a CD should not be used and they seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 can cause damage to the player 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD p
255. h the rear wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing
256. hich might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode Continued en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435 WARNING Continued WARNING During cold weather when temperatures are be Any procedure other than above could result in low sreeziug point elecmolyte 1m a discharged e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting the battery vent because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point be
257. horized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck STARTING AND OPERATING 375 For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds mm continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the 055007576 speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread
258. ht mee ph RR eR la RR 234 Octane Rating 0000004 386 489 Requirements 00000 e eee 386 488 Saver Mode 2 0 ce eee ae 251 252 Tank Capacity cx Ra x RR eus 488 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel Optimizer ue ede a ee arse Ra 251 528 INDEX as Fuel Savet occ zz R9 e Rye 251 FUSS ink bie Pared inae a cine aet ane i ad 475 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 174 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap se 396 444 Gasoline Fue 1 2 RE 440 45 386 Conserving 4 to sepia debe ee reds 251252 Gasoline Reformulated 387 Gauges aio dee ta cepe AU Deleg d Ch Rs 243 Coolant Temperature eese 227 Fuel ning ogee eed een RA od woe 2 227 Oil Pressure 000 eee eee eee 230 Speedometer ssh asa XU abe needs xe be 228 Tachometer 0 eee eee ee eee 227 VORMER era 2 540545 or Ed CHE aed eens 235 Gear Ranges sore E T EE RR 315 322 General Information 17 25 127 385 Glass Cleaning s cem haw chee eae eae e 473 Grocery Bag Retainer i eces he Rees 198 Gross Axle Weight Rating 399 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 399 Guide Body Buildets 22e e aspres 6 GVWR x9 sxe xe cn ede ds we bee beds ace es 397 Hands Free Phone uconnect 99 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 341 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 420 Head R
259. ht M31 20 Amp Bat Pwr Out 1 Yellow Pre Safe 2 Yellow M24 20 Amp Bat Trlr Tow M32 20 Amp Fr Rr Washer Yellow BUX HGM Yellow M25 10 Amp Bat J1962 Diag M33 15 Amp Bat NGC Red Mirrors Blue EATX PCM M26 10 Amp Bat Ign Sw Red WIN PASS 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M34 15 Amp Bat CCN M41 15 Amp IOD SDARS VES Blue Interior Light Blue 2 3 DVD HFM SCM Sw Bank UGDO Vanity M35 20 Amp Ign R Frt Seat Vent Lamp Yellow M42 10 Amp IOD HVAC M36 20 Amp Ign R Rear Seat Red U Hood Lamp Yellow Steer Wheel M43 10 Amp Horn 2 M37 10 Amp Horn 1 Red Red M44 10 Amp IGN R S ORC M38 20 Amp IOD CCN Interior Red OCM Yellow Mods M45 10 Amp IGN R ORC Trail M39 30 Amp IOD Amp Radio Red Tow BUX Sense Green M46 20 Amp IGN R Trail Tow M40 25 Amp Rear Wiper Yellow BUX Natural M47 10 Amp IGN R H Lamp Red Wash HVAC Park Assist Ir Sns ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse M48 20 Amp IGN R ACC Pwr Yellow Outlet 2 M49 20 Amp IGN R ACC Bat Yellow Pwr Outlet 3 M50 25 Amp ASD 1 2 Natural M51 20 Amp ASD 3 Yellow M52 10 Amp IGN R S SWAY Red TCASE DTCM FAD M53 15 Amp IGN R S MFSW Blue CNN SCM TPM RR View M54 20Amp
260. ial cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges anu Orson amici Demand GACUMILOEN of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as open possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to h the color of hicle e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint REN owen gee Nee touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is Wheel and Wheel Trim Care considered the responsibility of the owner All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner 472 MAI
261. ich there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss CAUTION Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always mainta
262. ide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Se E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change
263. ide of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Se After removing the dispensing nozzle tighten the gas cap 1 4 turn until one click is heard felt This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitted aftermarket cap can cause the MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system Loose Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard felt This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a
264. idual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button To reset a trip odometer display the desired trip odom eter to be reset then push and hold the button for approximately two seconds until the display resets 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO id i 4 Be EA Fuel Saver Indicator OOK i cou cen Reed edu Door Ajar LOW UrE nio a been neon Low Tire Pressure CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required ESPORBE oco cs ewm Ug E ESP Off BASCAP ici ie snide redeat rt dose Fuel Cap Fault BOPUSE pa ise d REN ees Sree aod Fuse Fault LoWASH Low Washer Fluid NOTE There is also an engine hour function This indicates the total number of hours the engine has been running To display the engine hours on the base cluster perform the following Place the ignition in RUN but do not start the engine With the odometer value displayed hold the TRIP button down for a period of six seconds The odometer will change to trip value first then it will display the engine hour value The engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area located in the instrument cluster Refer
265. if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If Equipped If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h Automatic Door Lock Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Auto Lock Doors under Customer Programmable Fea tures SETUP in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the OFF position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door LOCK switch 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock On Exit If Equipped This feature
266. ight should appear and disappear four times 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re enable HSA functionality EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Customer Programmable Features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Electronic Stability Program ESP The ESP system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path 054805602 ESP OFF Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or u
267. ights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Daytime Running Lights DRL Canada Only and Fleet Vehicles The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn OFF Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Multifunction Lever The multifunc
268. ill activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Remote Down Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system
269. in 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RETURN button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average
270. in the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 CAUTION American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade types of operating conditions the manufacturer only SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num
271. ing In Floor Storage Bin And Latch To open in floor storage bin lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid NOTE The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open the lid f 035205575 Opened Storage Bin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Seatback Storage Storage Regular Cab Located in the back of both the driver and passenger The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs front seats are pockets that can be used for storage the length of the cab 035205816 035205814 Drivers Side Seatback Storage Storage Bin 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Storage and Seats Crew Cab CAUTION The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats Lift the seats to access the storage com Always lift the storage compartment lids by using partment the handle Failure to lift the lids by using the handle can result in damage to the lids To open the storage compartments lift upward on the fonde me lateh cand Open te lid Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the rear seat Crew Cab Storage Grocery Bag Hooks REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the hea
272. ing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer And Tongue Weight Towing Requirements Towing Tips ll Snowplow ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models 403 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belt The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second intervals Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating WARNING e Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the shift lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Normal Starting Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait five seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEU
273. ing of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CDs on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the operation of a cellular phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor mance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocati
274. ings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park EVIC Warning Lights e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 e Electronic Speed Control Light 4 This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs y
275. intenance Schedule i M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E ervice scnedule 8 g S iN 4 Change the engine oil and engine oil 4 Rotate the tires A filter Q If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the N T Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary E Q Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine M Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary S Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system H P y Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for H Pi P p E damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Rotate the tires Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Sch
276. ion to select the previous station oo Maen Meni ona CO Aea en u Disc kadi Ma a een eee To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio e Track to change the track To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands e Previous Track to play the previous track e Next Track to play the next track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e
277. ion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con nection to tether anchors have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for their older products Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages one each behind the front center and right seats Quad Cab and Crew Cab models have three anchorages one behind each of the rear seats WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the
278. ions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Ve hicle Security Alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visible signals For the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle Use of the Sentry Key will disable the alarm Rearming of the System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the re maining doors and ignition To Set the Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrumen
279. ior Lights meree cc eee eens 85 Filters Ait Cleaner 2s RR teed oh ee ur aset 450 Engine Oll x pes dard eden d RO 450 489 ee INDEX 527 Engine Oil Disposal lesen 450 Flashers T r Signal 55 292 Debe ti dsa 85 152 227 Fl t lire 5towage since raan a aA 432 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range 4 shsie ax ae ue G eae ems 393 Engine Oil i aui pog ERAS E pe Feri 393 Fuel Requirements 0 390 392 Maintenance ss tse aces Baws eae BR he 394 Replacement Parts 0 00 0 000 394 Starting E ced nace etd Oder ta dors qns 393 Flooded Engine Starting 4 310 Fluid Brake 2 2 son 8 dose ese Ree R3 de es 490 Fluid Capacities 5 acts eda gad na whey Eee 488 Fluid Leaks zik eae Rem ecc sean aes 85 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 467 Brake ud ise e douce e Races oe d ee d 464 Power Steering so credora ss dux en irm isss 345 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 489 FOS Lights marnas eure te x Set 148 241 483 Fold Flat Load Floor llle 201 Four Wheel Drive llle 326 Four Way Hazard Flasher 420 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle leues 436 Front Axle Differential 00 465 Fuel 2629 ea x gow ad X PESESG SGT 386 Adding spo oie Cea ee eee eRe RR 394 CONSERVING 5 6 scade ie RM he lege G 251 252 Filler Cap Gas Cap 6 0 000 000 0050 396 Gauge cXwsscard ta teed Seed ETE 227 lig
280. ip WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Se AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Key Ignition Park Interlock into any forward gear when the engine is above This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter idle speed lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key is firmly on the brake pedal can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Th
281. irror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never off by pressing the power button at the base of the mirror spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate when the Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the dimming feature is activated mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side convex mirror could cause you to collide with an other vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex right side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 030405626 All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either Folding Mirror forward or rearward to resist damage CAUTION It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHI
282. is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 519 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s m
283. is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine Mopar parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain description and illustrations may differ from your vehicles equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 OCRk sb 2 4 ett 1 ELECTRONIC STASRLITY PROGRAM DRANT WATER INTEL REARWADON WMDSUEDWERR EXTERIOR BULA WOMMEAM TURAL UFAUOA ATED SAT ioc ADAMTAB PUCTRONC 2 ween WNTORMITTENT FALNE Omn Low PEDALE SVFFO CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM rA PN I wx P t ZD D
284. is vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Column Shifter If Equipped There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery 1 Turn the key to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine 2 Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position 3 Firmly set the parking brake STARTING AND OPERATING 313 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab through the access port ringed circle on the bottom of the steering column Interlock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Center Console Shifter If Equipped There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override using a flat bladed screwdriver carefully remove the override cover which is lo
285. isplay 041005556 e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Audio Modes display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Steering wheel EVIC control button as Steering wheel EVIC control button as it appears on the left side of the steer it appears on the right side of the di J ing wheel E steering wheel 0 7 Press and release the UP button to scroll up Press and release the SELECT button for access mm A ward through the main menus DTE mi gal to main menus sub menus or to select a System Info Messages Units Setup and sub 5 personal setting in the setup menu menus pack Press the RETURN button to scroll back to a Press and release the DOWN button to scroll previous menu or sub menu W downward through the main menus and sub menus 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion e Hood Ajar if equipped with hood switch e Key In Ignition e Turn Signal On e RKE Battery Low e LOW WASHER FLUID e Oil Change Required e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out e Park Assist Disabled e Service Park Assist System e Personal Sett
286. it to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF The optional Video Entertainment System VES con EQUIPPED sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets The system is located in the headliner behind the front row seat Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions b
287. ition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE
288. l ESP On mode of operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are desensitized There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable All Four Wheel Drive Vehicles in 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose the Following ESP Operating Mode This is the Only ESP Operating Mode in 4WD LOW Full Off This mode is intended for off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instru ment cluster to clear this message NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed 360 START
289. l Cruise Control 160 Electronic Stability Program ESP 356 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIGQ s n RR scio 9 e D ae UR ed dO 168 244 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 327 333 Emergency Brake ii oues dede Gopal 346 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 436 Hazard Warning Flasher 420 Jump Starting roo ce 0 0 0 0 433 Tow HOOKS 2eecceorkee m Rb dd eee 3 437 TOWING 3 26 oo g eS ssa eed oa a Beta S ba 437 Emission Control System Maintenance 445 492 Engine a ceesre 645 eee a ded eb PEE 441 442 443 Aur Cleaner ic 6 ana a 4e ak ERGO 450 Block Heater llle 311 Break In Recommendations 81 Compartment Identification 441 442 443 Coolant Antifreeze 2 llle 489 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 83 390 Flooded Starting ccs ee de sk eee de a 310 Fuel Requirements 42 REY n iiss 488 Multi Displacement 06 349 Oil gine ie XE ob bah CEES Oe ES 448 488 489 Oil Filler Cap i ga ated paces wae eh dka nien 449 Oil Selecon 44 2 uk oS don GAA a ERR 449 488 Oil Synthetic sides usa Evel resi LER 450 Temperature Gauge sau nerne merana Teea 227 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 64 Event Data Recorder erinti ais 67 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 83 390 456 Exhaust System sas cester ra eee 83 455 Exterior Lighting a pai e i 147 Exter
290. l activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Flash Lamps with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Lamps Lock under Customer Programmable Fea tures SETUP in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a d
291. l and engine oil filter LI Rotate the tires M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Replace the accessory drive belt s 0 O O O O C O C ood M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 507 il A 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service 126 Months Maintenance Schedule T Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil an
292. l need to refer ence your cellular phone Owners Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e For identification purposes you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect pho
293. lacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underin flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Tire Pressure Monitor System Components The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors
294. lar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form 518 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by NOTE A street address
295. lation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 4 Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure into place To reduce the risk of potential injury or property damage e Cargo must be secured Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs Extender should not be used as cargo tie down When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg load on the tailgate The bed extender is not intended for off road use When not in use the extender divider should be in stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed Locking Tab When in use all handles are to be in the locked position 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Bed Rail Tie Down System CAUTION The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 Ibs 113 kg and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo 5 aN amp f a Sie Adjustable Cleats Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents along either rail in order to keep cargo properly secure UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 To move the cleat to any position on the rail turn the nut To remove the cleats from the utility rail remove the end counterclockwise approximately three tu
296. layer will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders Th
297. le within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an 288 UNDERSTANDI
298. le Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information 34 Check Gauges This light illuminates when the voltmeter engine oil pressure or engine temperature gauges indicate a reading either too high or too low Examine the gauges carefully and follow the instructions contained below for each indicated problem NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the fuel gauge voltmeter oil pressure and engine tempera ture gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER NOTE The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating EVIC IF EQUIPPED eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status display CESE 23 F e Vehicle information warning message displays BL sel Customer Programmable Features SETUP Messages 0 C ispl Units English dor au Bep ay e Outside temperature display 1208mi e Trip computer functions e Distance To Empty DTE d
299. le is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Customer Programmable Features SETUP under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 for further information Parking Lights and Panel Lights DO To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 031405775 Fog Light Switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam i
300. le it lists options press the VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR button and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Commands The Voice Recognition VR system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF
301. leaners to clean your leather ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mir
302. lease the accelera tor pedal after turning the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the accessory position 2WD or 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped Use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 8 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in p
303. lect ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position Move the console shift lever left or right or toggle the switch on the column shift lever down or up to select the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second gear or 1 first gear when needed 051205603 Column Shift Lever Console Shift Lever On vehicles equipped with 4 7L or 5 7L engines use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear im proves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode first STARTING AND OPERATING 321 through third gear are underdrive gears and fourth gear is direct drive ERS fifth gear Overdrive is the same as the normal fourth gear When in the DRIVE position in first through fourth gear the first tap down will display the ERS designation for the current gear the transmission will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever switch one time in the direction the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap down will shift the transmission
304. lectronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 35 mph 56 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button located in the end of the lever once and the cruise indicator light located in the mes sage window of the cluster will illuminate showing that the Electronic Speed Control system is on To turn the Electronic Speed Control system off push the ON OFF button a second time and both the Electronic Speed Control system and indicator will turn off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET lever downward and then release Lift your foot off the acc
305. ler Tow Main 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J03 25 Amp Bat Passenger J11 30 Amp Pink Bat Sway Natural Door Node Thatchum Rear J04 40 Amp Bat ABS Pump Doors Green J12 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Joh 30 Amp Pink Bat ABS Valve Green J06 30 Amp Pink Bat H Lamp J13 60 Amp Yel Bat Rad Fan 1 Wash MTV low 2 SSR CM2200 Elec Vac J14 40 Amp Bat Folding Pump Green Seat PZEV J07 25 Amp Bat Driver Door J15 60 Amp Yel Bat IOD Main Natural Node low J08 30 Amp Pink Bat DTCM Axle J16 40 Amp Frt HVAC Motor Locks Green J09 30 Amp Pink Bat Plg Electric M17 25 Amp Bat Sunroof Brake Natural Skylight J10 40 Amp Bat L Bar Off M18 25 Amp TCM Trans Range Green Road Natural ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M19 5Amp Ign R ACC M27 15 Amp Bat CHMSL Tan Sunroof Window Blue Brake Sw Sw Illum M28 10Amp Bat Corax TPM M20 25 Amp Frt Wiper Red PEM HVAC Htr Lo Natural Pump E M21 25 Amp Door Locks M29 15 Amp Bat Folding Mir Natural Blue ror M22 20 Amp Fuel Pump M30 25 Amp _ Bat Inverter Yellow Natural M23 20 Amp Bat Trlr Lig
306. lgate If Equipped The lock is located next to the tailgate handle The tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel Features 222 ll Switch Bank Button Description 223 Upper Switch Bank 00 223 Lower Switch Bank 00 224 Bl Instrument Cluster Base 225 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 226 B Instrument Cluster Description 227 lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It Equipped lue nee ee e 244 EVIC Displays sede tme den Distance To Empty DTE Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped sees 251 lup Furct ons oie siteres MR oes 252 System Customer Information Features 253 Compass Display 0050 253 Customer Programmable Features Setup 255 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss li Electronic Digital Clock Clock Setting Procedure ll Sales Code RER REN AM FM CD DVD Radio If Equipped Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure Bl Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode
307. ling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section Shifting Procedure NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily re
308. ll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espa ol French Francais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Lock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INS
309. lll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information If Equipped 2s rm Rm Ree B re Chains vv RR eS MSnow Tires eenene Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations lll Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire Pressure Monitor System Components 372 374 374 374 375 376 376 377 378 379 379 381 383 Bl Fuel Requirements 5 7L Engine MMT In Gasoline General Information 00 3 7L And 4 7L Engine 0 0 Reformulated Gasoline Gasoline Oxygenate Blends E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehides Materials Added To Fuel LL Fuel System Cautions Carbon Monoxide Warnings li Flexible Fuel 4 7L Engine Only If Equipped Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 General Information 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses Fuel Requirements Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles Starting Cruising Range Replacement Parts Maintenance ll Adding Fuel Loose Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Message E Vehicle Loading Certification Label E Trailer Towing Common Towing Definitions 392 394 396 396 396 399 Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Tow
310. llow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF For vehicles equipped with an optional floor shifter EQUIPPED 7 A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver Optional Floor Shifter 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver 034805613 Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter Bench Seat 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel to the right of the radio This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Plays
311. longer stopping distances WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package will include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness STARTING AND OPERATING 409 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector p r Refer to the following illustrations 7 oO o O70 9 O0O O Of aT O Q 7 ot 0 HB O Q 057003765 2 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003766 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn Four Pin Connector 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps Female Pins 4 Park Toce Hlectric Brakes 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6
312. lso operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens Front Courtesy Reading Lights Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF they will extinguish after 15 minutes 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most g
313. ly 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in the TOW HAUL mode fifth gear is dis abled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified r 051205601 TOW HAUL Switch Shifts into Overdrive fourth gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to third gear are performed for improved braking when driving conditions warrant The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second gear the clutch automatically disengages
314. m porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 400 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjus
315. m periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the airbag deployed Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the surplus webbing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all the area behind the front seats Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is an audible click For proper seatbelt usage refer Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions in this section WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the s
316. manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders Refer to the Warranty information book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac turer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to www dodgebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your authorized dealer INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window WARNING on your vehicle the vehicle r
317. midity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging
318. molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design mm standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section wid
319. mproperly Refer to Jump Starting in Section 6 of this manual engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly It is located between the front grill and the radiator but underneath the black upper seal It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap It also has a c clip that is used for storage when not in use for the winter months During winter months remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c cl
320. n TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius
321. n any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type 346
322. n to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 RES RSC Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recogn
323. n you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 517 If NHTSA receives simi
324. nd cargo management system consisting of three fea e Integrated box side storage bins e Cargo extender divider e Bed rail tie down system Load Floor Securing Straps 4 Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rambox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins CAUTHON Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup ee box The cargo storage bins provide watertight lockable Failure to follow the following items could cause illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs 68 kg of evenly damage to the vehicle distributed cargo e Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly secured e Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 Ib 68 kg per bin To open a storage bin press and release the pushbutton located on the lid The Rambox lid will open upward to allow hand access Lift the lid to fully open UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 N 036706594 Rambox Pushbutton and Lock Rambox Light Switch The interior of the Rambox will automatically illuminate when the lid is opened In addition to the automatic illumination switch there is a manual on off switch located at the rear of each storage bin Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION
325. ndersteer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the e tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The ESP system has multiple operating modes depend ing on vehicle type Two Wheel Drive 2WD or Four Wheel Drive 4WD Four wheel drive vehicles may be equipped with either a four mode position 2WD 4WD LOCK
326. ne is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 NOTE If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of the gauge the Check Gauges indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading when in trip mode 16 Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The two trip odometers show indiv
327. ne will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you 3o want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the PHONE button to begin After the
328. ned for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle
329. new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WDs 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the ACC position NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss selected position indicator light will flash and the origi nal position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 2WD or 4WD LOCKs 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped You can use
330. ng Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru PE ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The
331. ng the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repo sitioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 045605559 1 Front Blower 4 DEFROST Mode 2 Temperature Control 5 Air Conditioning A C 3 MODE Control 6 RECIRCULATION Control 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Front Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position 045605649 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passeng
332. ning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 337 For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The four wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive Locks the front and rear drive shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pul
333. ning procedures must be followed fog lights if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Automatic Headlights If Equipped reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To This system automatically turns the headlights on or off remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol according to ambient light levels To turn the system on lowed by rinsing rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Headlights To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight A switch clockwise When the headlight switch is m on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instrument panel lights are also 031405773 turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight d A ic Headlight Positi switch back to the O Off position iomat Headtight Kosior 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehic
334. nition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MM es uh ae eE Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD ond label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the only The use of other sized discs may damage the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than CD player mechanism 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel ejected before a new disc can be loaded away and jam the player mechanism If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and a second CD if one is already loaded begin to play when you insert the disc The display will Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the show the track number and index time in minutes and other side is a CD should not be used and they seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
335. nnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the sys tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Uu for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with the
336. ns are located on the outboard side of the drivers seat cushion 031105757 Memory Seat Buttons The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to recall the driver s seat position driver s outside mirror position adjustable brake accelerator pedals position Automatic Temperature Control ATC temperature set ting and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN LOCK button is pressed NOTE The power lumbar option is not programmable with driver memory seats Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to two RKE transmitters each RKE transmitter linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Turn the vehicle key to the ON RUN position 2 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and both sideview mirrors to the desired positions NOTE Not all motors may be moved at one time Refer to the eight way power seat description in this section 3 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 4 Turn on the radio and set the radio
337. ns may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result NOTE The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a Low Tire message in the odometer Base Cluster or in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC screen indicating Low Tire for EVIC enabled clusters UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of C an onboard diagnostic OBDII system which monitors the emissions and engine control sys tem If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a
338. ns of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside tempera
339. nt all directions This self limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered sometime during usage One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package obstructing the full rearward movement of the driver s seat Once the obstruction is removed the self limiting control may store a new maximum position the self limiting control may be reset by reaching the new stored position then press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 Continued seat travel beyond the new stored position will indicate the self limiting control has been reset Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control This additional feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility into and out of the vehicle The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if the seat is positioned rearward enough and there is no benefit in moving the seat any farther rearward NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to
340. nt cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case position the indicator lights will do the following If all shift conditions are met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If one or more shift conditions are not met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC
341. ntinue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may discharge your battery vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to an authorized service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421 Jack Location The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat Removal To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the seat To remove the cover pull the front part of the cover closest to the front of the seat toward you to release a locking tab Once the front of the cover is loose slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame 060505826 Jack Access Cover 422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and WARNING sliding the assembly from under the seat After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving
342. o be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function If performance is not of your entire satisfaction please visit dealer to have your wiper blades replaced Adding Washer Fluid The fluid res
343. o the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 CAUTION Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist There are times when you may want to disable the Rear e The Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and itis Park Assist such as when towing a trailer unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be tempo rarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be The system can be turned on or off by the Park Assist switch located in the switch bank on the center of the E instrument panel detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver look over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist AUTO rusa Ww NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system Park Assist Switch 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M On vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC
344. oading Information 367 Power Door Locks 42 222 30 MIOS Sunburst Sat ek aac alte tise rea ea 96 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 183 188 DediS Se ee Sa dcs a eee areas dee 136 Sliding Rear Window 06 200 Ste ring sce G nse p EXER LE eee 343 345 SUNTOOR ope e oe eee eae aia 180 Windows lesen 34 Power Steering Fluid 05 490 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 52 Programmable Electronic Features 255 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 20 Radial Ply Tires cerae Ae ee os 374 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 459 461 Radio Satellite uconnect studios 285 534 INDEX ME Rear Axle Differential 0 465 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails 214 Rear Park Sense System 00000 163 Rear Window Features 00 199 Rear Window Sliding 0 00 200 Reclining Front Seats 0000000 134 Recorder Event Data 0 00000005 67 Recreational Towing 0000006 412 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 413 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 415 Reformulated Gasoline 00 387 Refrigerant slcsssscue cae cet Axa EA S 453 Reminder Seat Belt 0 acorta nia 51 Remote Control Starting System scies cs b eR weet 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 20 Remo
345. om the Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With bulb socket Cargo Lamp 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1 4 turn to 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to unlock it from the housing the body as shown 5 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 6 Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Separate the connector holding the housing and wir 3 Turn the desired bulb socket 1 4 turn and remove the ing harness to the body socket and bulb from housing 4 Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket gt ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 CAUTION e Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps e Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result housing 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate Regular Cab Shortbed Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters Regular Cab Longbed Crew Quad Cab Models Op 32 Gallons 121 Liters tional Engine Oil with Filter 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts
346. on ending with the lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE Ifitis necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dips
347. oor with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Horn Chirp under Customer Programmable Features SETUP in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press the PANIC button while still hold ing the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle w
348. or the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 865 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs Bitaddit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob s
349. or child restraint Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the Quad Cab and Crew Cab rear seat outboard positions LATCH equipped seating positions feature both lower anchor bars located at the back of the seat cushion and tether strap anchor ages located behind the seat back refer to Child Re straint Tether Anchor in this section 022605619 Quad Cab Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle 74
350. or the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delet
351. or using the parking brake it will roll down activated and compensates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill WARNING the incline and could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the incline while resuming accelera tion manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is re sponsible for braking the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine OFF and the vehicle in PARK with the wheels straight 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running and the brake applied rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center 4 Press the ESP OFF switch four times within 20 sec onds The ESP TCS Indicator L
352. orized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 24 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information i Each tire including the spare if provided by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
353. ou of a problem with the YA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi CX tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUT
354. ow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se vere transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature Indicator under continued operation could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the RETURN button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times with
355. pers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed 031505791 Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles to a cycle every two seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the washer knob located on the end of the multi function lever inward to the first detent The wipers will cycle three times and automatically shut off to clear road mist or spray from a passing vehicle Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer push the washer knob located on the end of the multifun
356. phones e To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx NOTE This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The
357. position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi mately 10 mph 16 km h Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors located in the rear bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 to 79 in 30 to 200 cm from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Park Assist Warning Display When the ignition is turned to the ON position the The Rear Park Assist Warning Display located in the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for approxi headliner near the sliding rear window provides both mately one second Each side of the warning display has visible and audible warnings to indicate the distance six yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the between the rear bumper and the detected obstacle obstacle when the red LED is ON The system dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow LEDs when it is ON and there are no obstacles being detected The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 032805242 Rear Park Assist LED Display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 WARN
358. r Quad Cab Mounted Shifter Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup For vehicles equipped with bucket seats and a floor holder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger mounted shifter there are two cupholders located in the convenience floor console Rear Cup Wells Cupholders Floor Mounted Shifter UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Rear Cupholder Crew Cab STORAGE Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage located in the center armrest The glove box is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area 035105803 Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder 035205586 Glove Box 1 Upper Glove Box 2 Lower Glove Box 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle To open the lower glove box pull on the handle to release release The glove box door will automatically open the latch and lower the door Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Door Storage Rear Door Storage Quad Cab Crew Cab Storage compartments are located in both the driver and Front Door Storage If Equipped passenber dace trn ode Storage areas and bottle holders drivers side only are located in the door trim panels 035205819 035205815 Rear Door Storage Front Door Storage 194 UNDERSTAN
359. r Conditioning System Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped Summer Operation Winter Operation Vacation Storage Window Fogging And Frosting Outside Air Intake Operating Tips 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040105708 1 Headlight Switch 7 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 Transfer Case Position Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 14 Ignition Switch 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank 15 Hood Release 4 Upper Switch Bank 10 Cup Holders 16 Parking Brake Release 5 Upper Glove Compartment 11 Climate Controls 6 Lower Glove Compartment 12 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 SWITCH BANK BUTTON DESCRIPTION 1 TOW HAUL Refer to Section 5 for more information 2 ESP OFF IF EQUIPPED Refer to Section 5 for more information 3 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER Refer to Section 6 for more information 4 115V POWER INVERTER Refer to Section 3 for more information 5 REAR PARK ASSIST Refer to Section 3 for more information Upper Switch Bank The upper switch bank is located on the center of the instrument panel 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Lower Switch Bank 1 HEATED SEATS The lower switch bank is located on the center of the Refer to Section 3 for more information instrument panel 2 VENTILATED SEAT
360. r Position e Extender Position Storage Position The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in use 036706565 To install the bed extender into the storage position Center Handivand Lock perform the following 1 Center Handle Lock 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the 2 Handle vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 With the side gates open position the extender fully 3 Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard forward in the bed against the front panel ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops M oss T f 036706567 y UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side 5 Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure gates in the closed position the panel into place and assist against theft Divider Position The divider position is intended for managing your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels 3o which allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo 036706568 Side Gates Closed 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To install the bed extender into a divider position per 2 With the side gates open
361. r this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is desig
362. ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each f
363. rakes When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability the remaining system will still func tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica tion greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light if equipped during brake use 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System WARNING The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment It may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS is de signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a
364. rect ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability ADDING FUEL The fuel filler cap gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter clockwise Once the cap is removed the tether of the fuel cap can be placed over the tab on the inside of the fuel door Hanging the cap will prevent unnecessary damage to the fuel cap and exterior of the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 395 CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and Fuel Filler Cap federal fire regulations and will cause the Mal Insert fuel nozzle and begin dispensing fuel When the function Indicator Light MIL to turn on nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full o A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is ins
365. ress and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink
366. rious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front
367. rns Then pull cap by pushing up on the locking tab located on the out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the bottom of the end cap Slide the cleat off the end of the desired location Make sure the cleat is seated in the rail detent and tighten the nut 038106533 038106532 Utility Rail End Cap 1 Utility Rail Detent 2 Cleat Retainer Nut 3 Utility Rail Cleat 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document available from your authorized dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions in this impor tant document NOTE When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle an alternate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL must be provided EASY OFF TAILGATE To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate Disconnecting the Rear Camera If Equipped 1 Open the tailgate to access the rear camera connector bracket located on the rear sill 036906361 Connector Bracket UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 2 Remove the connector bracket from the sill by press 4 Connect the ch
368. rocess the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met NOTE The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL IF EQUIPPED The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slip pery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a 340 STARTING AND OPERATING es slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive throug
369. ror 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The totally integrated power module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart 072905993 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse J01 30 Amp Pink Bat Presafe 1 J02 30 Amp Pink Bat Trai
370. rt If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn off the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the
371. rt Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keeping is accurately maintained On the REQ radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the RES only time or frequency is displayed at a time The RES RSC with satelli
372. ry Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary ood ood Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 509 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires J Replace the engine air cleaner filter Q Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines J Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only the service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
373. s J Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See M A IM 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service N id 18 Months Maintenance Schedule a Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Ll Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires A filter Q If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the N T Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary l T Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary change if using your vehicle for police 2 Inspect the CV joints S taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer 21 Inspect exhaust system C towing J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for H damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code
374. s However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts or the underbody CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis sion cannot be started this way Also there is a greater risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or towed If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power source 434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets w
375. s confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC Airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine
376. s directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode qe Air comes from the floor defrost and side window x demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix Bi Level or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or ct high hu
377. s operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse affect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M What Causes Corrosion e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and protective coatings from your vehicle and Tar Remover to remove The most common causes are e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint li T e aione and grave paci e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e Salt in the air near seacoast localities deis e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve i hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild etal and painted surfaces car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 Special Care e If you carry spec
378. s selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch is rotated to the far right detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way left to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right brighter or left dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031405772 Dimmer Control Cargo Light The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo button 031405776 Cargo Light Switch The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed as part of the Illuminated Entry feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 L
379. s with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Mix Mode Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use the DEFROST mode with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in Recircula tion mode Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mod
380. sage If the vehicle s diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to goin
381. sage particularly in sand or mud inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumu lated dirt at the propeller shaft axles U joints brake rotors and calipers Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud Check the exhaust system and all exposed components for any sign of damage If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for im pacted material Impacted foreign material can cause a wheel imbalance Removing the foreign material from the wheels will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost 344 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not i
382. se Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped downward speed decreases To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Your vehicle may experience a downshift automatic transmissions only while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist provides visible and audible indi cations of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations The Rear Park Assist can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If the Rear Park Assist is enabled at this shift lever
383. separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation This is normal The ABS conducts a low speed selftest at about 10 mph 16 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system and is normal Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Renta The ABS includes an amber warning light When the light WSENINGE Conunued is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system The ABS cannot prevent accidents including reverts to standard non anti lock brakes those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro WARNING planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckle
384. ses sos a dr no un Gave ben ede ak ones 3 451 Emergency Starting 000 00008 433 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Saving Feature Protection 151 Belts Seat id ies ca Re PR ERR RR YR 41 84 Body Builders Guide 0000 6 Body Mechanism Lubrication 453 B Pillar Location 52 RR ae 367 Brake Assist System 000000000 351 Brake Control System Electronic 350 Brake Fluid 0 0 00 e eee ees 464 490 Brake System ee e iesire niis 347 463 Anti Lock ABS 0205 348 350 Fluid Cheek a virent E NC UE ne 464 Master Cylinder seans perepea n rh dere neg 464 Parking acie Sage ad REG RR ARR P As 346 Warning Light gt cseccscrirrscnesiisres 235 Brake Transmission Interlock 313 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 81 Bulb Replacement 0 0 0 0 00050 481 Bulbs Light 3 0 0000s0 an 85 481 Calibration Compass 0000000006 254 Camera Rear ssa the ni vasa tends 168 Camper ie cisc cmos area end LEE ehe ed bea 216 Capacities Fuld canadien ce eem wees 488 Caps Filler Oil Engine 524 INDEX es Power Steering iae der 345 Radiator Coolant Pressure 461 Car Washes ios iused uoc ea rA RR EE P 470 Carbon Monoxide Warning 83 390 Cargo Light ce cb ratede Deresi Pariri 150 Cellular Phone ess vsus Bi eine Ges ay Sharam iene aha 99 Center
385. ss or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF the natural laws of physics from acting on the EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required Continued 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle to full functionality after a battery disconnect during hard braking maneuvers WARNING e ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Stability Program ESP and Trailer Sway Control TSC All of the
386. stem operation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable aaia Features SETUP in section 4 e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as DOOR LOCKS well as when you park and leave the vehicle Manual Door Locks Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving Front and rear doors may be locked or unlocked by unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a moving the lock plunger up or down number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle without lifting the lock plunger Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound
387. t cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed NOTE If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu ously during vehicle operation have the system checked by an authorized dealer To Disarm the System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 sound three times when you unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will run for two seconds and then the alarm will be initiated To exit the alarming mode press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Al
388. t five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NOTE e When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully seated the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a full sweep when the ignition key is cycled to RUN This is a normal condition When the vehicle is shipped from the factory the IOD fuse is in the up or extracted position If the radio interior lamps keyless entry or other features do not work with the key OFF check the position of the fuse or check to see if the fuse is blown to ensure that it is fully seated When the IOD fuse is extracted the instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis play NO FUSE ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Overhead Console Lamp TS 212 2 Dome Lamp esse RR ee 7679 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No BackUp iis ch each eed be RO eae eR Ea 921 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 921 Fog Lamp de meg OS ee en 9145 Dual Headlamp ue eeu etn H13 Quad Headlamp Low Beam H11 Quad Headlamp High Beam 9005 Side Marker Dual Headlamp
389. t the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving HEATING STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated 031705825 steering wheel and light indicator NOTE e The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate e The heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Section 4 for further information 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at lo
390. ta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the power rating is exceeded Each device to be powered should be checked first to make sure it does not exceed the outlet s 150 Watts maximum rating D 035005913 Power Inverter Outlet To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off ro 035005840 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 NOTE CUPHOLDERS e When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the power inverter status indicator turns on The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats The cupholders are located in the pull out tray at the bottom of the center stack 3 Due to built in overload protection the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Front Cupholders 035105612 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Rear Cupholde
391. table friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements 5 e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch 057003770 system may reduce handling stability and braking EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing Hitch performan
392. taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Center Lap Belts The center seating position for the Quad Cab and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfort able 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous e A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down and under the belt in a collision e A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Lo
393. tays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 28 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 40 This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 29 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti lock Brake System fes ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 30 Transmission Temperature Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission
394. te Sound System Radio Controls 291 Remote Starting System ses cimae s een eas 25 Replacement Keys p vrare and nonora i fenka 16 Replacement Parts 5395 ceia segist ai eias 446 Replacement Tires 376 Reporting Safety Defects 040 516 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 233 249 Restraint Head 1 ee 136 Restraints Child eese 69 74 Restraints Occupant 0 00 eee eee 39 Rotation Tires 0 0 ee 379 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 84 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 84 Safety Defects Reporting 516 Safety Exhaust Gas 83 Safety Information Tire 004 362 SafetyalipS gae s estne Sed pde S ee He ee hee 82 Satellite Radio Antenna 004 286 Satellite Radio uconnect studios 285 Schedule Maintenance sess 492 Seat Belt Maintenance 004 474 E INDEX 535 Seat Belt Reminder se ceesi tearan ii vemi ises 51 seat Bells iu ic bac VER Rn ale tae 39 41 84 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 49 And Pregnant Women 0 006 52 Child Restraint 4 05 4 06440 044 eR 69 81 EXtend E iiu ev deter Madore dosh bt epis 52 Front Seat 2224s ed e ie Ruhe 41 Inspection 6 ee 84 R mindef 2 laisse gu eR Sie en 242 Seats pis dad wee Paes eed Pa ahh Re 132 140 Adjustment 2 0 6 llle 132 Child 222i aes e ERG 81 Folding Floor ses 6
395. te radio will display both time and frequency and alternate between time and frequency when the time button is pressed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately five seconds SALES CODE RER REN AM FM CD DVD RADIO IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure uconnect gps RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being
396. te to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torques are shown in the fol lowing chart Disc Nut Type Stud Size Torque Torque Wheels Ft Lbs Nem Cone 9 16 18 110 150 160 200 To Stow The Flat Or Spare NOTE Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433 HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tion
397. ted Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Headlamps With Wipers When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if th
398. ted outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console Press the left side of the switch to open the glass and the right side of the switch to close the glass Rear Window Switch Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the
399. th of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction mW D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol Asymbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 366 STARTING AND OPERATING xs Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehi
400. that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 If an examination of your engine compartment shows no e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Surety driven The vapor will spon dissipate e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle equippe
401. the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to RKE Unlock Sequence under Customer Programmable Features SETUP in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle wil
402. the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Placard under Tire Safety Information in this section Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING e Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer tow ing as safe as possible Continued 406 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not
403. the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume dow
404. the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause se
405. the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary 12 Volt power outlets can provide power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The 12 Volt power outlets have a cap attached to the outlet indicating 12V DC together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery and can provide power at all times NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR
406. ther electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals pean NOTE Vehicle s built with the 4 7L engine are At Each Oil Change equipped with sixteen spark plugs One set is located on e Change the engine oil filter the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is located on the side of the engine Y ESPECIE DOSES oe The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard plug and must be changed every 48 000 miles CAUTION 80 000 km Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a premium plug and must be changed every 96 000 miles 160 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate the tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 month
407. ti Pinch Protection 4 Door Models Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually e If the Auto Up function is lost reset the Auto Up function by running the window all the way up and then hold the switch in the full up position for two seconds WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window LOCKOUT Switch 4 Door Models Only The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 press the window LOCK button into the latched or down Wind Buffeting
408. tick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter s should be changed It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle i
409. til all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 e The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key in not ON the shift will not take place and no 2 Turn OFF the engine position indicator lights will be on or flashing 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not e The flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that start the engin shift requirements have not been met 4 Press the brake pedal CAUTION 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Press the transfer case switch NEUTRAL button for 5 one second Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer 7 After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off release case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF the NEUTRAL button prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 8 After the NEUTRAL button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch Returning to Normal Operation Electronic Shift Transfer Case Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 9 Shift the transmission into PARK normal usage 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss NOTE e The flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indi e The transfer case cannot be shifted
410. tion for the correct fluid type The MOPAR Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made Transfer Case Drain and Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION e Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 CAUTION Continued e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid
411. tion lever is located on the left side of the steering column 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Turn Signals Move the lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective 031505789 Turn Signal Lever Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once and the turn signal left or right will flash three times then automatically turn off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off P 031505790 ee High Beam Low Beam 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers The wi
412. tness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the 432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME bolt circle tightening the wheel nut opposi
413. to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for more information ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving habits and vehicle usage LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three tim
414. transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 414 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Press the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Press the transfer case switch NEUTRAL button for four seconds 7 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light comes on release the NEUTRAL button 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Repeat Steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in DRIVE 12 Turn the engine OFF and place the ignition key in the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift the transmission into PARK 14 Apply the parking brake 15 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar 16 Release the parking brake NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the four seconds elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these require ments with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the four second timer then the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously un
415. ture condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in the case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your aut
416. ube extension may be used but is not required 4X2 Jacking Location 80ef9f80 430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE e For all trucks when changing a rear wheel as e Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench semble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the drive tubes extending to the rear Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 4 Raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface by rotating the wheel wrench clockwise WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install 060605565 the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the Rear Jacking Location All en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431 wheel nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct wheel nut tightness is 130 ft Ibs 177 N m torque If in doubt about the correct tigh
417. ume normal operation The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h 318 STARTING AND OPERATING xe When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to third gear and fourth gear will be enabled under steady cruise conditions 051205601 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be
418. unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and all doors closed 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Auto Unlock On Exit Programming If Equipped The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Unlock Doors If Driver Exits under Customer Programmable Features SETUP in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the OFF position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door UNLOCK switch 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 8 If a chime is not heard the program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If neces sary repeat the above procedure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
419. us if equipped e Iime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage e Airbag deployment level if applicable e Impact velocity and angle e Seat belt status e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status if equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Small Children Th
420. us chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off imme diately and call an authorized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap para graph 5 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph km h 6 4LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4 the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and LOW rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels For more information on four wheel drive operation and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped
421. ve your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a 7o against you tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or h
422. vehicle is dangerous for a The control on the left front door panel has UP DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of Quad Cab and Crew Cab models The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened NOTE The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement op erate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Up Feature with An
423. vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the proper maintenance intervals More fre quent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for 3 any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to E rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross C shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be Imt E i M reversed 055703771 Tire Rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381
424. w 044907138 Video Entertainment System VES REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045105562 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set pushbuttons 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginn
425. w temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals Adjustment 1 Position the driver s seat so that you are at least 10 in 25 4 cm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch located to the left side of the steering column in the direction you desire the pedals to move UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always Adjustable Pedals Switch adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked NOTE The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is set 031605590 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged E
426. warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authori
427. waying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in this section When TSC is func tioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes 362 STARTING AND OPERATING TSC is only active in the default ESP On mode TSC can TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION be disabled by pressing the ESP OFF switch and entering ESP Partial Off mode It is not active in the ESP Partial Off or ESP Off modes Please refer to the ESP portion of this section for an explanation of the different ESP operating modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle Tire Markings down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades en STARTING AND OPERATING 363 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P
428. when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 324 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Overdrive Operation The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth gear Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from DRIVE to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant antifreeze has reached normal operating temperature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal temperature operating NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cool down the transmis sion will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximate
429. with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to
430. y formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation 394 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with cor
431. you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 1 Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn screw until the jack is snug 060505827 Jack and Tools WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423 2 Position the jack and tool bag unrolled Make sure 3 Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn screw package in direction of arrows and tie to the jack using the tie straps 8105e6b6 81054f07 Turn Screw and Lug Folding Flap and Rolling Bag 424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 81054ece 81054ed3 Tying Bag to Jack with Straps Jack and Tools Tied WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425 4 Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn screw slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor and then secure to the floor pan using the wing bolt Reinstall the plastic cover 060505827 Jack and Tools 426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Removing The Spare Tire Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the win
432. zed dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 515 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufactur

2009 Ram Truck 1500 (Gas) Owner Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents